Home

R&S FSW-K84/-K85 1xEVDO User Manual

1. Input Source Config E IQ Export User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Index IQ fu E 56 Lower Level Hysteresis 103 Marker Config ET Meastime Auto eiit tede terti 103 Meastime Manual s sss 103 Min NEXE MIT EE EE OR ende Next Peak ie ERGER nd eene ties No of HalfSlots ss Norm Delt a i coc aree riti deter eere Outputs Config Peak Pr amp aet nerit aate Reference Manual e esses Reference Mean Pwr FRET OVE e ES ra E Ge Ee aa Ref Level OffSEt gg nece RH Restart on Fail RF Atten Auto RF Atten Mariali rre riri 81 RF Slot Full Idle iu Scale Config tati df NE OE Select Marker ri n cereo tyr ca SERE ER Ed EE Ke Set Mean to Manual go sade Signal ele IC Signal Description uites Single Sweep ss Sweep Config EE ed ere ite EE oce Sweep Co nlL ru ee ennt erede Ese eg Trace Config axbe Trigger Config ai Aviaries aces orien Trigger e irit ette Upper Level Hysteresis 103 Sort order NE RE 49 Codes Hadamard N OE 49 Span MERE EE iNi 58 Special channels MS RR EA 44 Specifics for COnfiQUration EE ere OE EE 61 Spectrum Emission Mask See SEM RP 34 Spreading factor ient ee 18 27 BIS application sis ESE SS ER RE EE Ee EE EDE ge ee Ee ed 266 MS application ep Querying remot
2. eese nnne nnns 49 4 9 Test Setup for 1xEV DO Base Station or Mobile Station Tests 50 4 10 CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode eee 52 5 VO Data Import and Export eeeeeeeeeeee ee ee nnn 55 5 1 Import Export Functions EER te reet Reha SEEK REEN RE ERGE ERK KAR E KEER REKE RR EENS EE RR RS RAE 55 ee ie ele EE EE EE EE OE EN 57 6 1 Result Display 200 Ere EE EE ER EE ee GE Re GE Ee ee Ee Ee De ki ee iie Ea LLLI eae Ee Li ee ee ke 57 6 2 Code Domain AnalySiS isi ke Ee Ee EE EES Ee RE REGEER ee GE Ge KOENEN kke Deed Ee kk ee 58 6 3 RF Measuremernlts ie EE EE EE erneut ite eg EE EE RR GE xao RE o Ee Ee ER EE Ee eed Pe RE ek ee edge 105 T Analysis EE c M 112 7 1 Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS application sees 112 IERE EE EE EE EE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 3 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Contents 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 8 1 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 11 14 Code Domain Analysis Settings MS application sees 113 Evaluation Range BTS application see ees ee ER RR EE EE RE EE Ee Re ER EE Ee Re RR EE Ee eke Ee 116 Evaluation Range MS application Re RR AAR RARR AR Re RR RE Rae Re ER Ee Ke
3. 7 1 1 About this Manual users Se ee EE Re Ge EE REG GR Re EE REG ek Re Ek Nee ek Ge ER ERG Ge Rede ERG ee ee ER EG Gee 7 1 2 Documentation OVerVleW sees RE RE E RAAR RE KEER RAAR RAK KEER nnn RR KERE Rea GR RAK KEER Re GR KAR KEER Ee aa 8 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation RE RARR EE ERA RR rennen 9 2 Welcome to the 1xEV DO Applications EE EE 11 2 4 Starting the 1xEV DO ApplicationS sees see RE ER RR RR RE ER EER RR RR RR EE RE nnn 11 2 2 Understanding the Display Information eee 12 3 Measurements and Result Displays eee 15 31 Code Domain Analysis eicere iie EG Ee EE REDES Ee RE REED Ge Led GEGEE Need Dek ke 15 3 2 RF Measuremients EE ER Ee REENEN Ee eerte Eie Ir oL Lo n ER Oe Ee Gee Ee kke ee ee dd 31 4 Measurement BASICS mc 40 AA Slots and Sets eni N eana 40 42 Scrambling via PN Offsets and Long Codes nee 41 43 Synchronization MS application only eee 42 44 Channel Detection and Channel Types eene een 43 d SUD POS E 47 4 6 Multi Carrier Mode eege EK En EG ccr EER ree eren En Ee a nana Eege see KA 48 4 7 Code Mapping and Branches uses ee ee see ee ee ER RE RR RA Re Ge Ge Ee AA AR RE RR RA RA Rae Ge Ee ee ee ee nnn 48 4 8 Code Display and Sort Order
4. Test Setup for 1xEV DO Base Station or Mobile Station Tests Risk of instrument damage during operation An unsuitable operating site or test setup can cause damage to the instrument and to connected devices Ensure the following operating conditions before you switch on the instrument e Allfan openings are unobstructed and the airflow perforations are unimpeded The minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm e The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation e The instrument is positioned as described in the following sections e The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet e Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges e Signal outputs are correctly connected and are not overloaded Required units and accessories The measurements are performed with the following units and accessories e An R amp S FSW equipped with the 1xEV DO BTS or MS option e R amp S SMU signal generator equipped with option SMU B9 B10 B11 baseband gen erator and SMUK46 1xEV DO incl 1xEVDV e 1 coaxial cable 50 Q approximately 1 m N connector e 2 coaxial cables 50 Q approximately 1 m BNC connector General Test Setup Connect the antenna output or TX output of the base station mobile station to the RF input of the R amp S FSW Use a power attenuator exhibiting suitable attenuation T d TX signal ig O80 TINIE e S RF
5. H s Configuring Code Domain Analysis SENSe CDPower CTYPe lt ChannelType gt This command is used to select the channel type The number of results then changes in most analyses such as code domain power symbol EVM and bit stream because either a different spreading factor or a different number of symbols is available for the analysis Parameters lt ChannelType gt PILot MAC PREamble DATA RST PILOT Example CDP CTYP MAC Select MAC channel type Manual operation See Channel Type on page 117 SENSe CDPower MAPPing lt SignalComponent gt This command switches between the and Q branch of the signal Parameters lt SignalComponent gt Q RST Q Example CDP MAPP Q Manual operation See Mapping on page 100 See Branch on page 119 SENSe CDPower MMODe Mode This command defines the mapping mode either automatically or user defined for all channel types Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO IOQ COMPlex 10Q or Q mapping COMPlex Complex mapping AUTO Mapping is defined automatically according to the channel type see Mapping on page 117 RST AUTO Example CDP MMODe COMP The pilot channel type and all other channel types is analyzed in complex mode Manual operation See Mapping on page 117 a H User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 209 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 6 Configuring RF Measurements
6. See I O Mode on page 71 SENSe SWAPiq State This command defines whether or not the recorded IQ pairs should be swapped I lt gt Q before being processed Swapping and Q inverts the sideband This is useful if the DUT interchanged the and Q parts of the signal then the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it Parameters lt State gt Manual operation Setting up Probes ON and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j I OFF and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q RST OFF See Swap Q on page 72 Probes can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed EE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 173 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements REESEN Configuring Code Domain Analysis SENSe PROBesp IDPARTnumber sesse sesse ee ee ee RR hehehe enne snnt ee Re RR Ee ee ee 174 SENS PROBE lt p gt ID SRNUMBET iiaa ee EH N ee ENE ER Ne EE KERE ER Dee ne 174 SENS amp PROBesp SETUpIMODE acies acest ere ER Re Oes Lata RE ener aaa Re eee EER ene sek 174 SENSE ee E E Ne E 175 SENSe PROBeSps SETUpIS ER 175 SENSe PROBeep SETUPTYPE ie ee ee ee ee Ge teet tentent t ee 176 SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID PARTnumber Queries the R amp S part number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 1 2 3 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Bas
7. LEE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 264 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Annex Predefined Channel Tables Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Preamble 64 chips long 1 3 32 BPSK I Data 16 0 16 16QAM 1 16 16QAM 2 16 16QAM 13 16 16QAM 14 16 16QAM 15 16 16QAM Table 1 4 Base station test model DO IDLE for idle slot configuration Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Pilot 1 0 32 BPSK I Mac 5 2 64 RA BPSK I Table 1 5 Mobile station channel table PICH Channel type Code channel Mapping Activity Walsh Code SF PICH 0 16 1111 1111 1111 1111 Table 1 6 Mobile station channel table PICHRRI Channel type Code channel Mapping Activity Walsh Code SF PICH 0 16 1111 1111 1111 1111 RRI 0 16 l 1010 1010 1010 1010 Table 1 7 Mobile station channel table 5CHANS Channel type Code channel Mapping Activity Walsh Code SF PICH 0 16 l 1111 1111 1111 1111 RRI 0 16 l 1010 1010 1010 1010 DATA 2 4 Q 1111 1111 1111 1111 ACK 4 8 l 0000 0000 0000 1000 DRC 8 16 Q 0110 0000 0000 0000 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 265 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Annex A 2 Channel Type Characteristics Channel Type Characteristics At a chip rate of 1 2288 MHz the symbol rate results as 1 2288MHz spreading factor The bit rate depends on how many bits describe a
8. Parameter SCPI Parame Description ter Active Channels ACTive Specifies the number of active channels found in the signal Detec ted data channels as well as special channels are regarded as active Carrier Frequency FERRor The frequency error referred to the center frequency of the Error FERPpm R amp S FSW The absolute frequency error is the sum of the frequency error of the R amp S FSW and that of the device under test Frequency differences between the transmitter and receiver of more than 1 0 kHz impair synchronization of the Code Domain Power measure ment If at all possible the transmitter and the receiver should be synchronized The frequency error is available in the units Hz or ppm referred to the carrier frequency Chip Rate Error CERRor The chip rate error 1 2288 Mcps in ppm A large chip rate error results in symbol errors and therefore in possible synchronization errors for Code Domain Power measurements This parameter is also valid if the R amp S FSW could not synchronize to the 1xEV DO signal Composite Data CODPower MS application subtype 2 3 only Power Power of composite data channel Delta RRI PICH DRPich MS application subtype 0 1 only Delta RRI PICH in dB User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 16 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays Code Domain Analysis Parameter SCPI Parame Description ter Rho Data RHOData BTS application only RHO over al
9. eese nnnm nnne 253 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUM ILEFT 0ccccescccceeceessseeceeceeeseseceseseceeneeeeuseceeaees 253 CAL Culate nz M Abker mz MiNimumNENT nnana ki aanraai 253 CAL Culate nz M Abker mmz MiNimum RIGH 253 CALCulate n MARKer m MlINimum PEAK eeeeseseesssesesesennn nennen enne 253 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzM AximumlEEFT 254 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT 254 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK eese nennen 254 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMANimumbRlcGHt 254 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimum LEET 254 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimumNENT 254 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eeeeeseseeeeen nennen 255 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 255 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 125 See Search Next Peak on page 126 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 252 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements LAEMERCEC
10. Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instru ment or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard oper ating procedures User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 9 Conventions Used in the Documentation The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a keyboard R amp S FSW 84 K85 Welcome to the 1xEV DO Applications Starting the 1xEV DO Applications 2 Welcome to the 1xEV DO Applications The 1xEV DO options are firmware applications that add functionality to the R amp S FSW to perform measurements on downlink or uplink signals according to the 1xEV DO stand ard R amp S FSW K84 performs Base Transceiver Station BTS measurements on forward link signals on the basis of the 3GPP2 Standard Third Generation Partnership Project 2 R amp S FSW K85 performs Mobile Station MS measurements on reverse link signals on the basis of the 3GPP2 Standard Third Generation Partnership Project 2 The 1xEV DO BTS application firmware is based on the cdma2000 Hig
11. im e M A mm 11 10 2 1 General Analysis e Individual Marker Gettnge AAA 249 e General Marker Settings c cera bte ab t EE De SERE De ibd he codd eR 251 e Marker Search and Positioning Settings cecinere eec 252 Individual Marker Settings CAL Culate lt n tMARKereme AOE esse ee Ie Ge Es le ovis oni ke Prae IRR n e rice 249 CALGulatesn MARKersm E STAT iicet ic het aaia bank GR Ad se GE Ed 249 CALCulatesn MARKereMP DE ee ee ee se Ee EE ee EE ee Ee EE ee RE Re ER Ge EE ee RE ee ee Ee ee Ee ee ee ee as 249 GALCOulatesmsDEL Famarket AOFF is dde aa EG RE EE Ed SE NE GE dee Ee 250 CALCulatesn DELTamarkersm STATel iese sees se se se ee ee ee ee de ee ee Re AR ER Ee nennen 250 CALCulatesn7 DELTamarkeremP NK 250 GALEulatesssDELTamarkersm DCRELAIVE GE GES Se ER GANS SEER ENS Re nado cath anre inni 251 GALE GulatespnssDEETamarker mo3M EE 251 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 124 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is currently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Ma
12. Reference level e ON OFF Keying sranane nennen OOKA Modulation type iese RA Ke Re ee AR ke 47 OOKN Modulation type eere 47 Operation mode TIFANSMISSION e ER EEN seek Ee ei Ek es ER ER GE Ee 115 Operation modes TRANSMISSION ee p 45 Optimizing UELLE ER EAEE 128 Options Electronic attenuation B25 oo ee ke ke 81 High pass filter B13 i Preamplifier B24 enne Output Configuration remote Configuration softkey Digital Baseband Interface B17 settings Digital Baseband Interface B17 status w 167 Digital VO remote oes 167 wecken AA OE M 74 Power measurement Configuring 108 tuper c M ss 73 ILE 74 90 Overload RF inp t remote RE N 160 Overview Configuring 1xEV DO ee ee ee Re ee Re 59 P Parameters io CRT EE EA DE 16 GRANNIES is EE erg es we Re AE de FR RE Ee Ee 18 Channel table ee Ee ee ee Re ee ee 119 Global 16 SONS isa Tm 17 PCDE ee RE ED GE DE eee nena EE ee ee 18 Peak Code Domain Error 2s 27 Evaluation method ee se ee 27 Measurement examples eene 142 Trace results eei oer rte a etri 240 Peak Code Domain Error see PC DE Em 27 Peak list Evaluation method ee se 38 Peaks Marker positioning esee 127 ER 126 cd EO IE 127 Peak search Ke sd EE EE DM E E 127 Mode se en ee eers
13. EE EE RU E e 1 EE 1 1 1 LL LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLUAUCUTALLUIL I User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 225 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements a a ull Starting a Measurement Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 101 INITiate SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 226 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 227 Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 227 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 227 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp
14. sees ee ee ee ee ke ee ee ee ee Re ee ek ee ee en trennen 254 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK eeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeenne nennen rennen 254 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmum LEET 254 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT see ee ee ee ee ee ee eene nnne nnne eke ee ed nnn ee 254 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmum HIGH 255 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK 05 GALGulatesns DELTamarker em DE su ee niria ab sa De NG EE Ee eese oa ROER ee EE ea bee be ge se ke ged sae Ee od ed 250 CALCulatesn DELTamarkersm CRELatiVe ese sees ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eke ee ee ee ee 251 CALCulatesn7 DELTamarkersmo vi 251 CALCulatesn DELTamarkersm STATe ee ee ee ke ke ee ee ee ee ee ke ke ee 250 CAL Culatesn gt FEED EE 261 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence 25 211 CALCulatesn7 LIMitek7 PVTime RVALu ees se ee ee ee ee ee ee ke ee ee ee ee ee ee Re ee ee Re ee ee ee ee rennen nena 212 CALCulate lt n gt MARKersm gt AOF RE AR EE RE AO OE EE OE AR E 249 CALCulatesnz MARKersm FUNCtion CDPower BTSIRESUIK ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Re ee ee ee 229 CAL Culate cnz MAbRker mz MAvimum LEET CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK essere nnne nennen nnne nennen 253 CALCulate n2 MARKe
15. iicet rennen enn eunte Ene ee ge ed 221 11 7 1 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independant of the application Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 154 DAE ies RO EO N EE 214 lo sadi dme 214 DISPlay FORMat Format This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters Format SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active channels SINGIe Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SPL Example DISP FORM SING DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL com mand see LAYout SPLitter on page 218 Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI EE EE EE EE EE EE SSSR User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 214 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 7 2 Configuring the Result Display Example DISP WIND2 LARG Working with Windows in the Display The following comman
16. DPower BTS SUBType on page 158 Remote commands exclusive to describing MS signals SENSE ICDPOWERLC ODEN xs RE dme M e E EE 159 SES etc enee itg erect tret a redi ehe generet keen Re een 160 SENSe CDPower LCODe Mask Defines the long code mask of the branch of the mobile in hexadecimal form EEUU RU EA I E E S NEE IE EE LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLU LATIO User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 159 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 5 2 11 5 2 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters Mask Range HO to H4FFFFFFFFFF RST HO Example CDP LCOD I HF Define long code mask Manual operation See Long Code Mask Long Code Mask Q on page 65 SENSe CDPower LCODe Q lt Mask gt Defines the long code mask of the Q branch of the mobile in hexadecimal form Parameters lt Mask gt Range HO to H4FFFFFFFFFF RST HO Example CDP LCOD Q HF Define long code mask Manual operation See Long Code Mask Long Code Mask Q on page 65 Configuring the Data Input and Output The following commands are required to configure data input and output For more infor mation see chapter 6 2 4 Data Input and Output Settings on page 66 MEI Loos eL ES 160 e Remote Commands for the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 163 e Configuring Input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B7f1 171 EE up Up FOD
17. EE MMN User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 277 R amp S FSW 84 K85 List of Remote Commands 1xEV DO SENSe CDPower PREPF6rence oa nen rrr ttr eer ee sk es ea pe scapes ee ees ees eed Kees AE ee Ke He eek de berede 207 SENSe CDPower iPRESSL rerit EE EG 262 SENSE EDPowerOINVert ss mie eke NES oe Se eret ve Ge ee GN oet recentes Pel ee dee gee Ed ve Gee Web Gee GE RES 193 El KE e Ree e RT 210 SENSe GDPower SET COUINL E 193 SENSE CDPOWEr SLOT ARE SENSe CDPower TPMeas SENSe FREQuency GENTGr uire o ennt enr epe ra ren er ep ede pa siada eade estadas 177 SENSe FREQuency CEN MANS AE EO ener Hektar ren ibn ena dunes kon te Edge 177 SENSe FREOuency CENTer STEP AUTO ees esse ee eene Re ee Re ee ee GR ee Re ee ee erret 178 IENGeFbREOuencv CEN Ter STEP UNK 178 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTOr ees ee se ee ee ee ee ee ee ee rennen nne rsen ee ee 178 SENSe FREQuenoy OFFSelt tr n mene iier ree nr Thea RE DR IEEE ER a Pe Runde rv Tr ee 179 SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFF Set ese ee ese ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ek Re ee ee ek ee Re ee ee ke erret tnter nennen enne 258 SENSe PROBe p ID PARTnumber esses ee ee Re ee ee E Re ee ee ek Ke ee ee ee ee ee 174 SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID SRNumber SENSe PROBe sp SETup MOBBE cox sevesnceacihe sic sts EE N N SENSe PROBep SETup NAME ees sesse ee see ee ee ee ee see ee ee
18. ee ke ek Re ee Re ee Re Ge Re Ge ee ke ee eke Re ek GR ee ee ee ee ee ee Re ee ee ee 217 LAY out IDENtify WINDOW 22s iiir OO EI EE EE N EE EE OE EN 217 EA derd dale Ruil Be EE EE EE N EE N 218 LAY out REPLace WINDOW israse eti rot tec edel En GE dete tb Dre RE ota SR eae edge aes 218 Edel EE 218 LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD 220 LAY out WINDow lt m gt IDENtify au EE IE EE EE RE ONE 220 LAYGUWINDOWENSREMOVS es see see EEN eredi ec te gee sl cetero bed Aa eed ee a a p Ue e te se eg eke ge a 220 LAYoutWINDowN REPLace AA 221 MMEMory EOADIG S TA Teva fetes EE RE ER 255 MMEMorv GTObelO COMMent ee ee ee ke Re ee ee de ee ee 256 MMEMory STORe O STATe ll le Ee ER e el NN Ge Ee BEE spp anssjenond EE OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection sess nnne nren neret nne ee reset eren nr ee ke enne 190 OUTP t TRIGger lt port gt BT DE OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe OUTburTRlGoerzportz PU GelMMedate 191 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe LENGIh esses ener enne nennen ennt nere nennen enne nnns 192 STATus OUEStionable DIG CONDItON AAA 169 STATus OUEStionable DIG ENABIe ese ee ee ee Re ee ke Re Re Re ee Re ee ee Re ee ee Gee ee ee eke ee 170 EE EE EE N N AE SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 276 R amp S FSW 84 K85 List of Remote Commands 1xEV DO STATus OUEStionable DIOG NTRansitiON ee ee ee ke AR RA ee AA enne nnne ee Re ee ee ee ee ed nnns nnn 170 STATus OUEStio
19. Symbol EVM The Symbol EVM evaluation shows the error between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal in percent for the selected channel and the selected slot A trace over all symbols of a slot is drawn a FDUU vJax 5 oko o e e eO eMAXA L LLOCLLaSG V b OyAoae wd User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 30 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 3 2 1 RF Measurements 4 Symbol EVM ei Clrw 1 Symb Symb Fig 3 16 Symbol EVM display in the BTS application The number of symbols is in the range from 1 to 100 depending on the symbol rate of the channel see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 266 Inactive channels can be measured but the result is meaningless since these channels do not contain data Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SEVM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 229 RF Measurements In addition to the Code Domain Analysis measurements the 1xEV DO firmware appli cations also provide some RF measurements as defined in the 1xEV DO standard RF measurements are identical to the corresponding measurements in the base unit but configured according to the requirements of the 1xEV DO standard For details on these measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual RF Measurement Types and Results The 1xEV DO applications provide the foll
20. Table evaluation method ssusssssss 38 Ke EE EE EE 123 Marker table COnmMQUIING Eise Res ERGE BEE EE ENE KEER etri err e 124 Evaluation method ees ee ke 38 Maximizing Windows remote ee ee Re ee 214 Maximum MEE EE EE EE 85 Measurement channel Activating remote ss esses 150 Creating remote Deleting remote Duplicating remote esses 151 Querying remote m Renaming remote esee 153 Replacing remote ee ee 151 Measurement examples CDP Center frequency deviation sssuuss 138 Composite EVM Frequency error PODE RE bei eie beer IE N RHO factor se m SEM Signal channel power sees 133 Synchronization Triggered CDP Trigger offset eee ei tea EE eee Wrong IPN OfSet ss aces rr rte eet Ese ee Ede 140 Measurements Results remote sess 229 RE neis Selecting Selecting remote A 154 Starting remote WY DOS EAS Measurement time Auto settings ON treni 103 Microbutton Die e 73 Minimum Marker positioning ccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 127 aD Softkey N 2 bc RR RE EE EE MKR gt GOEIE EE EE EE 126 Modulation eel SEA RE EE EN ER Bits per symbol S Inverted VO remote
21. EE EE MN User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 128 R amp S FSW 84 K85 How to Perform Measurements in 1xEV DO Applications 9 How to Perform Measurements in 1xEV DO Applications The following step by step instructions describe how to perform measurements with the 1xEV DO applications To perform Code Domain Analysis 1 10 11 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the 1xEV DO BTS application for base station tests or 1xEV DO MS for mobile station tests Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is performed by default Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for Code Domain Analysis Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected input signal Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is trans mitted Select the Signal Capture button and define the acquisition parameters for the input signal For MS tests select the Synchronization button and define the reference to be used for synchronization Select the Channel Detection button and define how the individual channels are detected within the input signal If necessary define a channel table as described in To define or edit a channel table on page 130 Select the Display C
22. Manual operation See Multi Carrier on page 63 See Filter Type on page 63 See Cut Off Frequency on page 63 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF lt RollOffFactor gt This command sets the roll off factor for the RRC filter Parameters lt RollOffFactor gt Range 0 01 to 0 99 RST 0 02 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 156 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements ee ee Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter CONF CDP MCAR FILT ROFF 0 05 Sets the roll off factor to 0 05 Manual operation See Multi Carrier on page 63 See Filter Type on page 63 See Roll Off Factor on page 63 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe State This command activates or deactivates the usage of a filter for multi carrier measure ments Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT OFF Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements Manual operation See Multi Carrier on page 63 See Multi Carrier Filter on page 63 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE Type This command sets the filter type to be used in multi carrier mode You can set the parameters for the RRC filter
23. Suffix lt port gt 11213 Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5 V to 3 5V RST 1 4V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 87 See Trigger Level on page 88 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IF Power lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed For compatibility reasons this command is also available for the baseband power trig ger source when using the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm LE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 187 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements REESEN Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example TRIG LEV IQP 3
24. 6 2 13 Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar SJS ZOOM C M E 104 Isle edele PR 104 Restore Onginal BT E 104 Deactivating Zoom Selection waert EER KEES RE ee SA tonta LR ker ea Se ER NE en eek 104 Single Zoom ER A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 222 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA on page 221 Multiple Zoom Ba In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corresponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 223 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 222 Restore Original Display Restores the original display and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 222 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 223 for each multiple zoom window Deactivating Zoom Selection mode R User Manual 1
25. Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle RESTore on page 197 Channel Table Settings and Functions Some general settings and functions are available when configuring a predefined channel table Channel tables are configured in the Channel Table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Copy or Edit buttons for a predefined channel table in the Channel Detection dialog box For details on channel table entries see chapter 6 2 10 4 BTS Channel Details on page 97 or chapter 6 2 10 5 Channel Details MS application on page 99 Dg MEM OR EE RE OE D ET ON 96 ei SEE OE OR venient dE ee GENEE dE 96 Adding EE aterert eie re pde o Ede era 97 paleung E Rer IT E 97 Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table 97 eltern ENKE 97 Cancelling the COMmgurauOmn RR 97 enema casas Sac Q 97 Name Name of the channel table that will be displayed in the Predefined Channel Tables list Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 201 Comment Optional description of the channel table Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COMMent on page 198 T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 96 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration DEET 6 2 10 4 Code Domain Analysis Adding a Channel Inserts a new row in the channel table to define another channel Deleting a Channel Deletes the currently selected channel from
26. eee 173 Inverted VQ MEER EE EE ed entere 72 IE RR rr Ainiai 19 Modulation types SEE EE EE EE EE EE RE MAC ius EE EE RE EE EE EO PT ON OFF keying entren tnnt 47 OOKA OOKN Tt e EE AR EE 47 MS Mobile station sissies erret deceret 11 MSRA Analysis interval seessssssss 91 92 192 Operating mode iese kk Ke AA ee ee 52 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 283 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Index MSRA applications Capture offset in enter 90 92 Capture offset remote eessssseeesess 258 MSR ACLR Results remote ee iriiria 244 MSRA Master Data Coverage AN OE EE EE oe 53 Multi carrier Vele il UR EE reete 63 65 158 Cartier detection sesse ds den died AE Ed de 63 65 158 Filter DES ET 63 65 157 Modes i inte ii ve tie rs 48 63 65 Multiple Measurement channels 0c 0ccceeseeeeeeeeees 12 57 Multiple ZOO ctio t rotten FEE Ke EN Se Ee 104 N Next Minimum Marker positioning eere 126 ln Pm 126 Next Peak Marker positioning cesse 126 kin ERR 126 Noise SOU RCC eis 74 NG OP MANSIONS sesse EE EE EE ee EN ge ek Ee EEN AD 106 O OBW 1xEV DO results orco ertet 35 occupied bandwidth Configuring 1XEV DO Offset Analysis interval sesse see ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Frequency
27. 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I Name string Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup STATe Queries if the probe at the specified connector is active detected or not active not detected To switch the probe on i e activate input from the connector use INP SEL ATQ See INPut SELect on page 163 Suffix lt p gt Return values lt State gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I DETected NDETected RST NDETected User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 175 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements DESSERT 11 5 2 5 11 5 3 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup TYPE Queries the type of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input Return values lt Type gt String containing one of the following values None no probe detected active differential active single ended Usage Query only Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 11 5 4 2 Configuring the Trigger O
28. 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW MWCD 3G FDD UE K73 TD SCDMA BTS BTDS TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW MTDS TD SCDMA UE K77 cdma2000 BTS R amp S FSW BC2K CDMA2000 BTS K82 cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW MC2K CDMA2000 MS K83 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW BDO 1xEV DO BTS K84 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW MDO 1xEV DO MS K85 WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN WLAN LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName ChannelName1 lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN Spectrum2 Spectrum3 Renames the channel with the name Spectrum2 to Spectrum3 T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 153 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements yy EEEMCCCC OO w H m P TmE 11 4 Selecting a Measurement INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt This command activates a new measurement channel with the de
29. 7 3 Evaluation Range BTS application The evaluation range defines which channel Code Number slot or set is analyzed in the result display Ch zs A Channel Type eurn T 116 ami M a N a 116 Ed es Me 117 MAPPING 117 Channel Type AE OE EE EE OE OE 117 Channel Selects a channel for the following evaluations see also chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 20 Bitstream Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power Peak Code Domain Error Power vs PCG Power vs Symbol Result Summary Symbol Constellation Symbol EVM The specified code is selected and marked in red For details on how specific codes are displayed see chapter 4 8 Code Display and Sort Order on page 49 The number of available channels depends on the specified channel type For channel type PILOT and PREAMBLE values between 0 and 31 are valid For channel type MAC the range is between 0 and 63 and for DATA channels the range is 0 to 15 Remote command SENSe CDPower CODE on page 208 Half Slot Selects a half slot for the following evaluations User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 116 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Analysis Evaluation Range BTS application Bitstream Channel Table Code Domain Error Power Code Domain Power Composite
30. CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates the multi carrier settings See Multi Carrier on page 63 CONFigure CDPower BTS SUBType lt Subtype gt Selects the subtype of the standard to be used for the measurements For more information see chapter 4 5 Subtypes on page 47 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 158 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 5 1 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters lt Subtype gt 0 1 2 3 0 1 subtype 0 1 2 subtype 2 3 subtype 3 RST 0 Example CONF CDP SUBT 3 Subtype 3 signal is analyzed Manual operation See Subtype on page 62 SENSe CDPower PNOFfset Offset This command sets the PN offset of the base station in multiples of 64 chips Parameters Offset Range 0 to 511 RST 0 Example CDP PNOF 45 Sets PN offset Manual operation See PN Offset on page 62 MS Signal Description The following commands describe the input signal in MS measurements Useful commands for describing MS signals described elsewhere CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency on page 156 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF on page 156 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 157 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe on page 157 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo on page 158 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe on page 158 G C a G CONFigure
31. CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COMMen1 2 2 c cccccerenneeenenetecceeanseaeereeeceeneneeees 198 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA 2 csceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceseaeaaaeaaaeaeaeasaenseetenens 198 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA esses h ER Ee enne 200 CoONFigure CDPower BTS C TABISINAME sies seks se sg es tn n Ret tx gena Gees d cu run Dip dunno 201 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for the selected channel table Prior to this command the name of the channel table has to be defined with command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 201 Parameters Comment Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name CONF CDP CTAB COMM Comment for table 1 Defines a comment for the table CONF CDP CTAB DATA 9 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 00 9 1 0 0 05 0 1 05 00 7 1l 0 256 8 0 1 0 00 Defines the table values Manual operation See Comment on page 96 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt Modulation gt lt Reserved1 gt lt Reserved2 gt lt Status gt lt CDPRelative gt This command defines a channel table The following description applies to the EVDO BTS application only For the MS appli cation see CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 200 Before using this command you must set the name of the channel table using the CONFigure CDPower BT
32. In the Channel Table dialog box define a name and optionally a comment that describes the channel table The comment is displayed when you set the focus on the table in the Predefined Tables list Define the channels to be detected using one of the following methods Select the Measure Table button to create a table that consists of the channels detected in the currently measured signal Or a Select the Add Channel button to insert a row for a new channel below the currently selected row in the channel table b Define the channel specifications required for detection Select the Save Table button to store the channel table The table is stored and the dialog box is closed The new channel table is included in the Predefined Tables list in the Channel Detection dialog box To activate the use of the new channel table a Select the table in the Predefined Tables list b Tap the Select button A checkmark is displayed next to the selected table c Toggle the Use Predefined Channel Table setting to Predefined d Toggle the Compare Meas Signal with Predefined Table setting to On e Start a new measurement To perform an RF measurement 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the 1xEV DO BTS application for base station tests or 1xEV DO MS for mobile station tests Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is performed by default Select the RF measurement a Press the MEAS k
33. Input Frontend LH Channel Detection Predel Tables Table Name EI AT 1 Code Domain Power D In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and evaluation by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview The available settings and functions in the Overview vary depending on the currently selected measurement For RF measurements see chapter 6 3 RF Measurements on page 105 For Code Domain Analysis the Overview provides quick access to the following con figuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Select Measurement See Selecting the measurement type on page 57 2 Signal Description See chapter 6 2 3 Signal Description on page 61 3 Input Frontend Seechapter 6 2 4 Data Input and Output Settings on page 66 and chapter 6 2 5 Frontend Settings on page 77 4 Optionally Trigger See chapter 6 2 6 Trigger Settings on page 85 5 Signal Capture See chapter 6 2 7 Signal Capture Data Acquisition on page 91 6 Synchronization MS application only See chapter 6 2 9 Synchronization MS application only on page 93 7 Channel Detection See chapter 6 2 10 Channel Detection on page 93 8 Analysis User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 60 R amp S FSW
34. Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 69 T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 166 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements aa a eN ee ee eee Configuring Code Domain Analysis INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 see Input Sample Rate on page 69 Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 69 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital VO input signal is set automatically by the con nected device This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 69 OUTPut DIQ State This command turns continuous output of UO data to the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 on and off Using the digital input and digital output simultaneously is not possible Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example OUTP DIQ ON Manual operation See Digital Baseband Output on page 76 OUTPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital VO data output to the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Return values lt ConnS
35. PODE cre mete rir eds ee iere 27 CDEP Code Domain Error Power iese ee eke ee ee 22 Color assignment m Evaluation method ees ee ke 22 DE dr ER OE EE EE 237 CDP Absolute Relative suss 113 115 207 ole N N e d erede 113 115 205 Channel table Color assignment Display std ge ieee leaks Evaluation method Measurement examples sss 136 Reference power A Results remote BT ee RE RE OE EE Trace resulte o erret Triggered Measurement example Center frequency RR EE EE N ee Preis Analog Baseband GB Deviation Measurement example DONKGY a ids DISD SIZE m OE AE ER aae a AEN Channel bandwidth MSRAIMOGE 5 o nr hte e eR 53 Channel DAN 2 ento er ve rtv ever eee eco 13 Channel detection Nie lie EA E 43 Configuring EO RE eere HE ERR 93 Methods Predefined tables 5 SES ER Ee ENE ERA KEER EES 43 Remote commands sees see ee ee 194 195 Search mode Te ars er ba OR hii dod ied eia Channel number Configuring in table E RT ee odore Hei cte te tee a Ni Channel power ACLR Ted EE e OE ne rib IE 33 Channels 2 ER EE IE fake 266 ActVE nud eade 16 17 94 98 100 197 Bandwidth s nne e tte Rd 266 SE RR E Evaluation range dee ee ee ee Inactive showing T Number xoi ione ferte reset Re rese et esterne Selected Display iese e
36. connector RST RF Example INP CONN AIQI Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Connector on page 68 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input The command is not available for measurements with the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 67 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 RETE RU RA N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 161 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements mLAmET EX e Configuring Code Domain Analysis Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are sup pressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 68 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This co
37. on page 28 See Power vs Symbol on page 28 See Result Summary MS application only on page 29 See Symbol Constellation on page 30 See Symbol EVM on page 30 See Diagram on page 37 See Result Summary on page 38 See Marker Table on page 38 See Marker Peak List on page 38 See Evaluation List on page 39 Table 11 6 lt WindowType gt parameter values for 1xEV DO application Parameter value Window type BITStream Bitstream CCONSt Composite Constellation CDBits Composite Bitstream MS application with subtype 2 or 3 only CDConst Composite Data Constellation MS application with subtype 2 or 3 only CDEPower Code Domain Error Power CDPower Code Domain Power CEVM Composite EVM CRESults BTS Channel results CTABle Channel Table User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 216 R amp S FSW 84 K85 ee ee nel Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Configuring the Result Display Parameter value Window type DIAG Power vs Time diagram BTS application only GRESults General results BTS application only LEValuation List evaluation SEM Power vs Time MTABle Marker table PCDerror Peak Code Domain Error PCHip Power vs Chip BTS application only PHSLot Power vs Halfslot MS application only PSYMbol Power vs Symbol RSUMmary Result Summary SCONst Symbol Constellation SEVM Symbol EVM LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries
38. Example for Hadamard order With Hadamard sorting the following code order is displayed the Pilot channel is selected 1 Code Domain Power I Branch 1 Gode Fig 4 5 Code Domain Error Power result display in Hadamard code sorting order The same results in Bit Reverse order 1 Code Domain Power I Branch Fig 4 6 Code Domain Error Power result display in BitReverse code sorting order For the display in the 1xEV DO BTS application the scale for code based diagrams dis plays 32 codes For the display in the 1xEV DO MS application the scale for code based diagrams dis plays 16 codes Test Setup for 1xEV DO Base Station or Mobile Station Tests Before a 1xEV DO measurement can be performed the R amp S FSW must be set up in a test environment This section describes the required settings of the R amp S FSW if it is used as a 1XEV DO base or mobile station tester Before starting the measurements the R amp S FSW has to be configured correctly and supplied with power as described in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Preparing For Use Furthermore the application firmware 1xEV DO BTS or 1xEV DO MS must be enabled Installation and enabling of the application firmware are described in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 50 R amp SS9FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics pe ua M Uu M
39. Example of answer string 5 56 19 25 13 69 i e mean power 5 56 dBm peak power 19 25 dBm crest factor 13 69 dB Query only See CCDF on page 36 CONFigure C DPower BTS PVTime LIST RESult Queries the list evaluation results The results are a comma separated list containing the following values for each list range Return values lt RangeNo gt lt StartTime gt lt StopTime gt lt AverageDBM gt lt AverageDB gt lt MaxDBM gt lt MaxDB gt lt MinDBM gt lt MinDB gt consecutive number of list range Start time of the individual list range Stop time of the individual list range Average power level in list range in dBm Average power level in list range in dB Maximum power level in list range in dBm Maximum power level in list range in dB Minimum power level in list range in dBm Minimum power level in list range in dB User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 246 R amp SEFSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 10 11 10 1 General Analysis lt LimitCheck gt Result of limit check for the list range 0 Passed 1 Failed lt Reserved1 gt 0 currently not used lt Reserved2 gt 0 currently not used Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Time BTS application only on page 32 General Analysis The following commands configure general result analysis settings concerning the trace and markers for CDA measurements Analysis for RF Measurements General result analysis
40. If no offset is specified or no external trigger is available calculation is much slower as the correct PN must be determined from all possible positions For details see chapter 4 2 Scrambling via PN Offsets and Long Codes on page 41 Remote command SENSe CDPower PNOFfset on page 159 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 62 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration mE O E EEUN NUR Code Domain Analysis Multi Carrier Activates or deactivates the multi carrier mode This mode improves the processing of multi carrier signals It allows you to measure one carrier out of a multi carrier signal Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe on page 158 Enhanced Algorithm Multi Carrier Activates or deactivates the enhanced algorithm that is used for signal detection on multi carrier signals This algorithm slightly increases the calculation time This setting is only available if Enhanced Algorithm on page 63 is activated Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo on page 158 Multi Carrier Filter Multi Carrier Activates or deactivates the usage of a filter for signal detection on multi carrier signals This setting is only available if Enhanced Algorithm on page 63 is activated For details see chapter 4 6 Multi Carrier Mode on page 48 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARr
41. PICHRRI Channel tables for MS application Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle CATalog on page 195 Selecting a Table Selects the channel table currently focussed in the Predefined Tables list and compares it to the measured signal to detect channels Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 197 Creating a New Table Creates a new channel table For a description of channel table settings and functions see chapter 6 2 10 3 Channel Table Settings and Functions on page 96 For step by step instructions on creating a new channel table see To define or edit a channel table on page 130 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 201 Editing a Table You can edit existing channel table definitions The details of the selected channel are displayed in the Channel Table dialog box N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 95 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration 6 2 10 3 Code Domain Analysis Copying a Table Copies an existing channel table definition The details of the selected channel are dis played in the Channel Table dialog box Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY on page 196 Deleting a Table Deletes the currently selected channel table after a message is confirmed Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete on page 196 Restoring Default Tables Restores the predefined channel tables delivered with the instrument
42. Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS RFSLot on page 213 Burst Fit Activates an automatic burst alignment to the center of the diagram If enabled the fol lowing steps are performed e 1 The algorithm searches the maximum and minimum gradient 2 The maximum peak between these two values is determined 3 From this point the 7 dB down points are searched 4 If these points are within plausible ranges the burst is centered in the screen oth erwise nothing happens By default this algorithm is OFF This function is only available if the RF Slot is set to Idle Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime BURSt on page 212 Reference Mean Pwr If enabled the mean power is calculated and the limit lines are set relative to that mean power The standard requires that the FULL slot first be measured with the limit line relative to the mean power of the averaged time response This value should also be used as the reference for the IDLE slot measurement Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k PVTime REFerence on page 211 Reference Manual Defines the reference value for the limits manually Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence on page 211 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime RVALue on page 212 Set Mean to Manual When selected the current mean power value of the averaged time response is used as the fixed reference value for the limit lines Reference Manual i
43. This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 183 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This command is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 It is not available if R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 81 INPut EATT AUTO lt State gt This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 It is not available if R amp S FSW B17 is active User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 183 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements EMG EMEMOCCC O H P s Dc eue Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 81 INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off This command
44. remote ie ee ee 188 RF signal power D RF Slot Full ldle Rho RHO factor Measurement examples sssseses 142 Results remote essen 229 Roll off factor RR filler NEE EN EES RE itae 63 66 156 RRC filter Ee RE EE OR OE EE N 157 RRC Filter Cut off frequency ie ee 63 66 156 Multi carrier 63 65 IROll off TACION ORR ri N 63 66 156 RRI Channel typ8 4 rete ciii OE pedea 44 ioi M 18 RUN CONT GEE ER E too Fe Ed 101 RUN SINGLE GR IE RE ein bec ii E Da rte geb 101 S Sample rate ce Configuring in channel table A Digital VO ee es nt erra Perte Ee ER Radon 69 Digital VO remote ee Re ee 167 Saving FUNCIONS ER De ER E 55 Scaling Amplitude range automatically 85 Configuration softkey see 85 pco EE a N e EE 85 gl CL WE 41 Select Marker ele ii AE RA EE OR 122 Select Meads eege 57 SEM 1xEV DO results esse ee ke kke RR ee Re ee eke 34 Bandclasses Configuring sEV DO sese 109 Measurement examples iese ee ee 135 Results remote eter re terrenis 233 SOQUCNCEN ei Em Aborting remote s essen Activating remote Mode remote sk EE Se SEER Rede Eed torte earn TUE EE EE EE IE EE Set Mean to Manual i Power vs Time remote iese sesse ee ee ee ee ee 211 Sets Capti l
45. vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the available memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be performed at any time namely the one in the currently active channel However in order to perform the configured measurements consecu tively a Sequencer function is provided If activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs including the MultiView as the measurements are performed Sequential operation itself is independant of the currently displayed tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during a 1xEV DO BTS measure ment All different information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections The basic screen elements are identical for 1xEV DO MS measurements User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 12 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Welcome to the 1xEV DO Applications Understanding the Display Information MultiView 1xEV DO BTS CDMA2000 BTS Ref Level SE Freq 1325 GHz Channel eL EM 1 Att IDE Slot f C
46. 02 08 70 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration Code Domain Analysis They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Input Source Power Sensor Frequency Input Settings External Mixer x Input Config Digital IQ Swap 1 Q Analog Baseband Signal Path Center Frequency CF P For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual If Analog Baseband input is used measurements in the frequency and time domain are o not available Analog Baseband Input State ese dd ee Re AA nennen nens 71 Hos ves ME RA EE EE EE PA 71 put GontiGUFUGR RETE 72 SANET OE EE IE N EN 72 Gomer PREQUGIC CEA 72 Analog Baseband Input State Enables or disable the use of the Analog Baseband input source for measurements Analog Baseband is only available if the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 163 UO Mode Defines the format of the input signal For more information on UO data processing modes see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and VO Input User Manual jQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two inputs are required for a complex signal one for the in phase com ponent and one for the quadrature component poe O eras User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 71 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration V
47. 1 BTS Channel Types on page 44 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 198 Channel Number Walsh Ch SF Channel number consisting of walsh channel code and spreading factor Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 198 Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted Modulation Modulation type used for transmission For a list of available modulation types see table 1 8 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 198 Power Contains the measured relative code domain power The unit is dB The fields are filled with values after you press the Meas button see Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table on page 97 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 198 Status Indicates the channel status Codes that are not assigned are marked as inactive chan nels Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 198 Domain Conflict Indicates a code domain conflict between channel definitions e g overlapping channels ee User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 98 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Configuration maa c Mna J Code Domain Analysis 6 2 10 5 Channel Details MS application Channel details are configured in the Channel Table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Copy or Ed
48. 149 Capitalization 146 Character data 149 Data blocks se 150 Numeric values Bi 148 Obsolete LT 261 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 Optional keywords ese ee Re Re ee ee 147 VUIS RE OE EE re 148 Strings eg SUKE M M 147 Resetting RF input protecton ee ee ee ee 160 Restart oni Fail EE OR EE EE 107 TEUR EE ER EE EE n 212 Restoring Channel settings iese ee kk Re ee 61 262 Predefined channel tables 96 197 Result displays CDA Channel Bitstream ees ee Code Domain Error Power D Code Domain Power Composite Constellation esses Composite Data Bitstream remote i Composite Data Constellation remote 240 Composite Data EVM remote 240 Composite EVM T Composite EVM remote n sesse se ee ee ee ee 240 el ue nl EE Configuring remote e Diagram EEN Evaluation list pancino ana Marker table T Peak Code Domain Error s ssesseeseeereerrieerrresrererrree 27 dIE M Power vs chip Power vs Chip remote Power vs half slot ssssseeeee Power vs half slot remote ia Power vs Symbol si cerei ien Result Summary sss see also Evaluations Symbol Constellation ie ee RA ne SymbolEVM uiii EE RE RE
49. 178 SENSe FREQuency CENT amp r STEP LINK FAGTOL 2 erret SSA Ge ge Ke ee NR eed vee Ge 178 ka MES es EEN 179 SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency Parameters Frequency The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center Frequency on page 72 See Center on page 78 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 177 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 177 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements a_a CA m Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the c
50. 84 K85 Configuration 6 2 3 6 2 3 1 Code Domain Analysis See chapter 7 Analysis on page 112 9 Display Configuration See chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 20 To configure settings gt Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Select a setting in the channel bar at the top of the measurement channel tab to change a specific setting Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key on the front panel restores all measurements in all mea surement channels on the R amp S FSW to their default values See chapter 6 2 1 Default Settings for Code Domain Analysis on page 59 for details Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 154 Select Measurement Selects a different measurement to be performed See Selecting the measurement type on page 57 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicat
51. 9340 02 08 272 Reference VO Data File Format iq tar TUT EL oplmnj Channel 1 Complex sample 1 rt2 IH Ster EG Channel 2 Complex sample 1 I 0 2 oo 21 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 TELT 2 Gil LI Channel 1 Complex sample 2 Ii21121 O21 121 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 I 0 3 oo 3 Channel 0 Complex sample 3 I 1 3 Q 1 3 Channel 1 Complex sample 3 EFSI 3 QI2Z I3 Channel 2 Complex sample 3 R amp S FSW 84 K85 List of Remote Commands 1xEV DO List of Remote Commands 1xEV DO POR ge 223 CAEGulate EIMitske FAIL N fred OE e E Pt eer RR rete nt ait ae N 243 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWEer RESUIF ee ee ee ek Re eene nennen entretenir nena 244 CAL Culate MSRAALING SEIOVWV oie verse Ve iint BASEER nett le teer ep ends ne An De Ee Sie da ke Su 257 CALCulate MSRACALINeEMVALUG 3 rii tcs rn eg deeg dee cea ende ep er teen o cra eg de ee dee ED es ee sd ped ese de 257 CALCulate MSRA WINDowen VAL ee ee ee ke ee ke Re ee RA ee enne AA ee ee eke erint rins ee Re ee ee ee ee ee ed ee sena 257 CALCulate STATistics RES lt tE OR EE EE OE RE OR EE ON 246 CALCulatesn DELTamarker AO 250 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mzMAximum LEET 254 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT 1 254 CALCulatesn DELTamarkersm MAXimum RIGH
52. ACLR and SEM measurements in 1xEV DO applications an additional softkey is available to select the required bandclass Bandclass The bandclass defines the frequency band used for ACLR and SEM measurements It also determines the corresponding limits and ACLR channel settings according to the 1xEV DO standard For an overview of supported bandclasses and their usage see chapter A 3 Reference Supported Bandclasses on page 267 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass on page 213 6 3 4 Spectrum Emission Mask The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement shows the quality of the measured signal by comparing the power values in the frequency range near the carrier against a spectral mask that is defined by the 1xEV DO specifications The limits depend on the selected bandclass In this way the performance of the DUT can be tested and the emissions and their distance to the limit be identified Note that the 1xEV DO standard does not distinguish between spurious and spectral emissions The Result Summary contains a peak list with the values for the largest spectral emis sions including their frequency and power The 1xEV DO applications perform the SEM measurement as in the Spectrum applica tion with the following settings Table 6 5 Predefined settings for 1xEV DO SEM measurements Bandclass 0 800 MHz Cellular Span 4 MHz to 1 98 MHz Number of ranges 5 Fast SEM ON Sweep time 100 ms
53. Automatically Auto Level on page 80 Code Domain Analysis Settings Some evaluations provide further settings for the results The commands for Code Domain Analysis are described here SENSe JODPawerAVERAe cte stone eee teer at x eM KAR GE Moed Eed ees 205 ia kere ie ei EE EE HE OE N EE EE 206 ISENSedCDPower OPERAI RR REESEN 206 SENSe CDPower ORDel 222 2 c ccercceceeeeeececeuneeeseeteeeeenaneseaeaunsasaneneeeneeeetenaecauaaneenerers 206 SENSG CD POWER PDISPlAY C EN 207 SENSE IEDPAWEPREESIEROE TT 207 SENSe CDPowerTPMeas issie ee ee Ee Re ee ee ee ee ee AA AR ee ee ee ed ede eke ke ee ee ee 207 SENSe CDPower AVERage State If enabled the CDP is calculated over all slots and displayed as required by the 1xEV DO standard This command is only available for Code Domain Power evaluations Parameters State ON OFF RST 0 Example CDP AVER ON Activate averaging CDP relative over all slots Manual operation See CDP Average on page 113 EE EE EE EE EE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 205 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Configuring Code Domain Analysis SENSe CDPower NORMalize lt State gt If enabled the UO offset is eliminated from the measured signal This is useful to deduct a DC offset to the baseband caused by the DUT thus improving the EVM Note however that for EVM measurements according to standard compensation must be disa
54. CCDF measurement of the complementary cumulative distribution func tion signal statistics CDPower Code Domain Analyzer measurement ESPectrum check of signal power Spectrum Emission Mask OBWidth measurement of the occupied bandwidth POWer Signal Channel Power measurement with predefined settings according to the 1xEV DO standard RST CDPower Example CONF CDP MEAS POW Selects Signal Channel Power measurement Manual operation See Power vs Time BTS application only on page 32 See Power on page 32 See Channel Power ACLR on page 33 See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 34 See Occupied Bandwidth on page 35 See CCDF on page 36 See Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table on page 97 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Signal DESC PUM eme 156 Configuring the Data Input and Oue ese cab enticed ce ne 160 Frontend Reie 0 s i197 er 176 Configuring Triggered MeasurementS iss reete ete kh ten 184 Signal CA Plae EE 192 Synchronization MS application only cuan eene regente 193 Channel Detecllgfi OE peace eee Re re EE OR EE TER 194 SWESD sui AE OE EE ER EE 201 EERSTEN 3 3 EAR REENEN 202 Code Demain Analysis Settings 222 riter a deett od ee rede da 205 EE EE led Rang e 208 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 155 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 5 1 11 5 1 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Signal Description Th
55. Comment gt DateTime 2011 01 24T14 02 49 DateTime lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 269 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Annex Reference VO Data File Format iq tar lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt DataFilename xyz complex float32 DataFilename lt UserData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat Element Description RS IQ TAR FileFormat The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute fileFormatVersion that contains the number of the file format definition Cur rently ileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd Samples Contains the number of samples of the VO data For multi channel signals all channels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude
56. Configuring the Result Display LAY out WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this command the suffix lt n gt determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 for a list of available window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtify WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Query only LAY out WIND
57. Constellation Peak Code Domain Error Power vs Half Slot Power vs Symbol Result Summary Symbol Constellation Symbol EVM Remote command SENSe CDPower SLOT on page 210 Set to Analyze Selects a specific set for further analysis The value range is between 0 and Number of Sets on page 92 1 Remote command SENSe CDPower SET on page 210 Mapping Switches between the evaluation of the or the Q branch or the complex signal in BTS measurements Mapping can be defined manually for all channels or automatically depending on the channel type Table 7 1 Automatic mapping according to channel type for evaluation Channel type Mapping Pilot lorQ MAC loQ Preamble loQ Data Complex This setting affects the following evaluations Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power Peak Code Domain Error Power vs slot Result Summary Remote command SENSe CDPower MMODe on page 209 Channel Type In the 1xEV DO BTS signals each of the four channel types occurs at a specific time within each slot Thus instead of selecting a code you can also select which channel type is to be evaluated and displayed directly By default the Pilot channel as the first in the slot is evaluated User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 117 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Analysis 7 4 Evaluation Range MS application Pilot MAC Preamble Data For further details on the characteristics of the channel t
58. Data channels in ascending order by code class and within the code class in ascend ing order by code number 3 Unassigned codes with the code class of the base spreading factor T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 235 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Retrieving Results In the MS application the channels are sorted according to these rules 1 All active channels 2 Allinactive or quasi active channels in ascending code number order branch first followed by Q branch Data channels in ascending order by code class and within the code class in ascend ing order by code number 3 Unassigned codes with the code class 4 Results for CTABle Parameter BTS application The command returns 12 values for each channel in the following order max time offset in s gt channel type for max time code number for max time code class for max time max phase offset in rad channel type for max phase offset code number for max phase code class for max phase reserved 1 gt reserved 4 For details on the individual parameters see table 3 3 Value Description time offset maximum time offset in s channel type channel type see table 11 2 code number code number of the channel with maximum time offset code class code class of the channel with maximum time offset phase offset maximum phase offset in rad cha
59. EE 112 113 Bella eo RE RE EE EE 18 Remote m see also Channel number 266 Selecting AE EE tti periit pee eene N 116 118 Code Power Display CodeS M Won M Mapping Power display sese 113 115 n alle Ve ez odie canoe crm EE IE RUE 43 Short ere dle EE EO OE DE 22 49 114 206 Complementary cumulative distribution function S66 CCDE EN 36 Composite Constellation Evaluation method ese AA Re 24 Ee GR Aves N EE EO Aaa 239 Composite data Bitstream trace results sse 239 Constellation trace results tee EVM me NE 19 EVM trac result iese siek Ee Ee ien eed ae ee bee 240 Modulation ao ER EE OE RE RE ONE Composite EVM esse nter De Fete dne de ee ders Evaluation method zi d Measurement examples sssssssees 141 Tirace results rn EE sl tale e te eren 240 Continue single sweep SOKOV es XR 101 Continuous sweep ele GE 101 Conventions SCPI ommands 2 nie eie tein 146 Copying Measurement channel remote 151 Coupling Irnip t remote aueh Ee et rhe 161 Cut off frequency RRG filter EE EE EN 63 66 156 D Data acquisition dz de 91 92 192 see Signal capturing sees 91 Data channel me EE Ese N dee en De es eed 44 Eu pe I ea 117 Data format a
60. EE P jen Results Calculated remote sss CDP remote eon et t term ate Data format remote e Evaluating x e en Rete oed Exporting remote Retrieving remote RE remote EER der Pre ete OO eene Trace remote inier re cene eicere Trace data remote Trace data query remote 234 235 Updating the display remote 258 Result Summary Evaluation method siiicar ee 29 38 Result display ER ES EER ES EE GE tei eerte 38 Trac results irn treten rene 241 Retrieving Calculated results remote sssssss 228 Results remote 2 RF Results remote see dek ee ee 243 Trace results remote ie ee RR Reede 233 RF Slot K84 remote command s s s ereere 213 RF attenuation Ned el LG DE EE EE tasted 81 Manual softkey iese ee ee RR ee ee eke 81 285 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Index RF UNDUE e 66 Connector remote ee ss RR RA ke ee ee de Overload protection remote aure RF measurements Ewe DEN eege EE AE NE rette 31 OR EE EE 112 Analysis remote ie ee esses 247 Configuring ES Configuring remote sese 210 PetrfOrmilig ir eret EAE ere nine ees 130 Results Results remote kk ee ee 243 Selectirig RE RE OE ER ER has 105 Re EER EE EE WE EE N EE 31 RF Power Trigger level
61. Enter the external attenuation Enter the reference level Enter the center frequency Set the trigger If used enable the external reference Select the 1xEV DO standard and the desired measurement N Oo oO ho N Set the PN offset 4 10 CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode The 1xEV DO BTS application can also be used to analyze data in MSRA operating mode User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 52 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications receive an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the appli cation data For the 1xEV DO BTS application in MSRA operating mode the application data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal capture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the 1xEV DO BTS measurement Data coverage for each active application Generally if a signal contains multiple data channels for multiple standards separate applications are used to analyze each data channel Thus it is of interest to know which application is analyzing which data channel The MSRA Master display indicates the data covered by each application restricted to the channel bandwidth used by the corre sponding standard for 1XxEV DO 1
62. FunclioriS ER eret tae 96 e ie see ER N RE ME en 97 e Channel Details MS application EE retail cto e aate evidens 99 6 2 10 1 General Channel Detection Settings Channel detection settings are configured in the Channel Detection dialog box which is displayed when you select the Channel Detection button in the configuration Over view User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 93 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Configuration Code Domain Analysis O UO U T Inactive Channel Threshold 40 0 dB Predefined Channel Tables BTE Iure iare Rear Tore Msi Predefined Vleie Predefined Tables DO16QAM DO8PSK EEN DO IDLE n Edit DOQPSK Copy 1xEV DO standard table Delete Restore Default inactive Channel Threshold EA EE EE GE DE e REIR EA ee ede 94 Using Predefined Channel Tables tiat ite he erret bdo 94 Inactive Channel Threshold Defines the minimum power that a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be recognized as an active channel The default value is 60 dB With this value all channels with signals such as the 1xEV DO test models are detected by the Code Domain Power analysis Decrease the Inactive Channel Threshold value if not all channels contained in the signal are detected Remote command SENSe CDPower ICTReshold on page 197 Using Predefined Channel Tables Defines the channel search mode Predefined Compares the input signal to the predefined c
63. Hadamard or BitReverse code sorting order see chap ter 4 8 Code Display and Sort Order on page 49 RETE RU RA a User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 22 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays Code Domain Analysis 1 Code Domain Power I Branch Fig 3 4 Code Domain Power Display in the BTS application 1 Code Domain Error Power I Branch Fig 3 5 Code Domain Error Power result display Active and inactive data channels are defined via the Inactive Channel Threshold The power values of the active and inactive channels are shown in different colors Table 3 4 Assignment of colors in CDEP result display Color Usage Red Selected channel code number Yellow Active channel Green Inactive channel Light blue Alias power of higher spreading factor Magenta Alias power as a result of transmit diversity Remote command CDP LAY ADD 1 RIGH CDPower See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES CDP OF CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES CDPR see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESu1t on page 229 CDEP LAY ADD 1 RIGH CDEPower see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 229 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 23 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays REESEN Code Domain Analysis Composite Constellat
64. INPUT The following values for external attenuation are recommended to ensure that the RF input of the R amp S FSW is protected and the sensitivity of the unit is not reduced too much User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 51 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics EMEN EMO Es CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode Maximum Power Recommended external attenuation 2 55 to 60 dBm 35 to 40 dB 2 50 to 55 dBm 30 to 35 dB 2 45 to 50 dBm 25 to 30 dB 2 40 to 45 dBm 20 to 25 dB 2 35 to 40 dBm 15 to 20 dB 2 30 to 35 dBm 10 to 15 dB 2 25 to 30 dBm 0 to 10 dB 2 20 to 25 dBm 0 to 5 dB lt 20 dBm 0 dB e For signal measurements at the output of two port networks connect the reference frequency of the signal source to the rear reference input REF INPUT of the R amp S FSW e The R amp S FSW must be operated with an external frequency reference to ensure that the error limits of the 1xEV DO specification for frequency measurements on base stations mobile stations are met A rubidium frequency standard can be used as a reference source for example e Ifthe base station mobile station has a trigger output connect the trigger output of the base station mobile station to one of the trigger inputs TRIGGER INPUT of the R amp S FSW see Trigger 2 3 on page 74 Presettings For details see chapter 6 2 Code Domain Analysis on page 58 1
65. Interface R amp S FSW B17 is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS con nector The parameter specifies which general purpose bit 0 to 5 will provide the trigger data The assignment of the general purpose bits used by the Digital IQ trigger to the LVDS connector pins is provided in Digital VO on page 88 RST IMMediate TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 189 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements DESEN 11 5 4 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 87 See Trigger Source on page 87 See Free Run on page 87 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 87 See Digital VO on page 88 See IF Power on page 88 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval Interval This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger Parameters Interval 2 0 ms to 5000 Range 2ms to 5000s RST 1 0s Example TRIG SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering TRIG TIME RINT 50 The sweep starts every 50 s Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors The tasks for manual operation are described in Trigger 2 3 on page 74 OUTPut TRIGgereport DI Rectibon iriie eee acere eene aeu nenne ana nhanh haha kane ren de
66. MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 229 Power vs Symbol The Power vs Symbol evaluation calculates the absolute power in dBm for each symbol in the selected channel and the selected half slot User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 28 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays Code Domain Analysis 1 Power vs Symbol 1 Symb Symb 5 Fig 3 13 Power vs Symbol result display Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PSYMbol see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 229 Result Summary MS application only The Result Summary evaluation displays a list of measurement results on the screen For details on the displayed values see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 16 Note BTS application In the BTS application the result summary is divided into two different evaluations e Channel and code specific results see BTS Channel Results on page 21 e General results for the set and slot see General Results BTS application only on page 26 The Result Summary shows the data of various measurements in numerical form for all channels 2 Result Summary Results Set OMT at uits Half Slot OY Channel Results Fig 3 14 Result Summary display in the MS application The Result Summary is divided into three parts e General results for the selected set e Slot
67. Number of power classes 3 Power reference type Channel power User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 109 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration RF Measurements For further details about the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements refer to Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement in the R amp S FSW User Manual D Changing the RBW and the VBW is restricted due to the definition of the limits by the standard To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset e Sweep time e Span The main measurement menus for the RF measurements are identical to the Spectrum application However for ACLR and SEM measurements an additional softkey is avail able to select the required bandclass Bandclass The bandclass defines the frequency band used for ACLR and SEM measurements It also determines the corresponding limits and ACLR channel settings according to the 1xEV DO standard For an overview of supported bandclasses and their usage see chapter A 3 Reference Supported Bandclasses on page 267 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass on page 213 6 3 5 Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Bandwidth measurement is performed as in the Spectrum application with default settings Table 6 6 Predefined settings for 1xEV DO OBW measurements Setting Default value 96 Power Band
68. OE OE OR EE A 21 iE EF 22 Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power 22 Composite EE ET 24 Composite Data Bitstream MS application only ee ee ee RA ee RR ee 24 Composite Data Constellation MS application only 25 Composite EVM EE 25 General Results BTS application only Ee ESE inte nea oct reb coeno dre bna 26 Peak Code Doman EO di Eo arret ad eb daa GE denas 27 Power vs Chip BTS application on 27 Power vs Halfslot MS application only es ctetu 28 Power ET 28 Result Summary MS application SA Ee REG EEN EA GE trt nee 29 Symbol Se gs AU OM RM RE HR RA RE EKARA ANENE NE 30 les AA EE N EE EE N OE EER 30 E User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 20 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays Code Domain Analysis Bitstream The Bitstream evaluation displays the demodulated bits of a selected channel over a selected slot All bits that are part of inactive channels are marked as being invalid using dashes 3 Bitstream Table Uu T PN age rp ge POUR PA PCS 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 EE Fig 3 1 Bitstream result display in the BTS application To select a specific symbol press the MKR key If you enter a number the marker jumps to the selected symbol If there are more symbols than the screen is capable of displaying use the marker to scroll inside the list The number of symbols per slot depends on the spreading factor symbol rate and the antenna diversity The number of bits per symbol depends
69. PEAK see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 249 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 232 Evaluation List Displays the averaged maximum and minimim values and the measurement range for the current measurement Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH LEV See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 a User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 39 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics Slots and Sets 4 Measurement Basics The R amp S FSW 1xEV DO applications perform measurements according to the cdma2000 High Rate Packet Data standard which is generally referred to as 1xEV DO First EVolution Data Only 1xEV DOO was specified by 3GPP2 3rd Generation Partnership Project 2 The follow ing link provides access to 3GPP2 specifications http www 3gpp2 org Public_html specs index cfm The 1xEV DO standard was developed from the cdma2000 standard which in turn was an extension of cdmaOne IS 95 All these standards are based on the same RF param eters thus the RF measurements of cdma2000 and 1xEV DO are identical In the code domain however cdma2000 and 1xEV DO are not compatible since the chips for 1xEV DO are assigned chronologically one after the other to the different channel types and in the DATA channel type 8 PSK and 16 QAM modulation methods are used in addition to QPSK With cdma2000 only BPSK and QPSK modulation methods are used Fur thermore a slot is alw
70. PRRI gt lt RHO gt lt MACCuracy gt lt PCDerror gt lt ACTive gt lt FERRor gt lt FERPpm gt lt DRPich gt lt RHOVerall gt lt TFRame gt lt CERRor gt lt IQOFfset gt lt IQIMbalance gt lt SRATe gt lt CHANnel gt lt SFACtor gt lt TOFFset gt lt POFF set gt lt CDPRelative gt lt CDPabsolute gt lt EVMRms gt lt EVMPeak gt For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 16 EEUU RU RA a User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 241 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 9 3 19 11 9 3 20 11 9 4 Retrieving Results Symbol Constellation When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the real and the imaginary branches of each symbol are returned Res lt IMo gt Re Im lt Re gt Im The number of values depends on the number of symbols and therefore the spreading factor see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 266 Symbol EVM When the trace data for this evaluation is queried one EVM value per symbol is returned value in gt The number of values depends on the number of symbols and therefore the spreading factor see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 266 Exporting Trace Results Trace results can be exported to a file For more commands concerning data and results storage see the R amp S FSW User Man ual MMEMapG hb CL AS Ga N
71. RST OFF Example CDP TPM ON Activates timing and phase offset CDP SLOT 2 Selects slot 2 CDP CODE 11 Selects code number 11 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES TOFF Reads out timing offset of the code with number 11 in slot 2 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES POFF Reads out the phase offset of the code with number 11 in slot 2 Manual operation See Timing and phase offset calculation on page 113 11 5 11 Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which data is evaluated in the result display SENSES ICDPOWERCODE E Rs 208 ISENSe CDP e SR Ii T 209 SENSe COPOWERMAP PING io sesse tene otto ENE Ge eee dieters 209 SENSGICDPOWERMMO e 209 BENSeEDPOMSSET ES 210 ELE Bles Ee RE OE RR OE EE EE RE OR 210 SENSe CDPower CODE lt CodeNumber gt This command selects the channel code number The maximum number depends on the spreading factor and thus on the channel type For details on the relationship between channel types and spreading factors see chap ter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 266 Parameters lt CodeNumber gt Code number depending on the channel type Range 0 to lt Spreading factor gt 1 RST 0 Example CDP CODE 11 Selects code number 11 Manual operation See Channel on page 116 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 208 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements i PY
72. S FSW User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual SSS N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 226 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Parameters Mode Example Starting a Measurement SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been performed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements INITiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SYSTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only in MSRA mode The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by all active MSRA applications Example Usage SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler IN
73. SENSe CDPower SET lt SetNo gt This command selects a specific set for further analysis The number of sets has to be defined with the SENSe CDPower SET COUNt command before using this com mand Parameters lt SetNo gt Range 0 to SET COUNT 1 Increment 1 RST 0 Example CDP SET COUN 10 Selects the 11th set for further analysis counting starts with 0 Manual operation See Set to Analyze on page 92 SENSe CDPower SLOT lt numeric value gt This command selects the slot PCG to be analyzed Parameters lt numeric value gt Range 0 to 63 Increment 1 RST 0 Example CDP SLOT 7 Selects slot number 7 for analysis Manual operation See Half Slot on page 116 Configuring RF Measurements RF measurements are performed in the Spectrum application with some predefined set tings as described in chapter 3 2 1 RF Measurement Types and Results on page 31 For details on configuring these RF measurements in a remote environment see the Remote Commands chapter of the R amp S FSW User Manual The 1xEV DO RF measurements must be activated in 1xEV DO applications see chap ter 11 3 Activating the Measurement Channel on page 150 The individual measurements are activated using the CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 154 command see chapter 11 4 Selecting a Measurement on page 154 In addition to the common RF measurement configuration commands described for the ba
74. The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Trace Mode on page 121 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram In 1xEV DO applications only 4 markers per window can be configured for Code Domain Analysis EE EE EE EE EN AE EE SSSR SSS User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 248 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements REGES GN UNE J
75. This menu is also displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key on the front panel The Span Bandwidth Lines and Marker Functions menus are not available in the 1xEV DO application Code Domain Analysis can be configured easily in the Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu Importing and Exporting UO Data The VO data to be evaluated for 1xEV DO can not only be measured by the 1xEV DO applications themselves it can also be imported to the applications provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated VO data from the 1xEV DO applications can be exported for further analysis in external applications The import and export functions are available in the Save Recall menu which is dis played when you select the LI Save or EI Open icon in the toolbar For details on importing and exporting UO data see the R amp S FSW User Manual User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 58 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration EENEG 6 2 1 Overview Code Domain Analysis e Default Settings for Code Domain Analysis esses 59 Os ie de ie RE EE N dh 59 LEES 1 OR se dle ie CS 61 e Data Input and Output Settings eee SR EER EERS ER ERK ESE SE EDS Gee Ke SE be ee 66 ED ers ase eg el e BG pet RE OE EE X da 71 ees Te AE EA EE EE EA RA AE ER ER 85 e Signal Capture Data Acquisittgri iiiter n iiia iil teh da eaae 91 e Application Data
76. approximately 1 0 kHz a Code Domain Power measure ment on the R amp S FSW is still possible A frequency error within this range causes no apparent difference in the accuracy of the Code Domain Power measurement In case of a frequency error of more than 1 0 kHz the probability of incorrect syn chronization increases This is indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message If the frequency error exceeds approximately 1 5 kHz a Code Domain Power mea surement cannot be performed This is also indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message 2 Resetthe center frequency of the signal generator to 878 49 MHz The center frequency of the DUT should not deviate by more than 1 0 kHz from that of the R amp S FSW 10 4 Meas 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power Ifthe code domain power measurement is performed without external triggering a section of the test signal is recorded at an arbitrary point of time and the firmware attempts to User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 138 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples Meas 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power detect the start of a PCG To detect this start all possibilities of the PN sequence location have to be tested in Free Run trigger mode This requires computing time This computing time can be reduced by using an external frame trigger and entering the correct PN offset If the search range for the start of the power control group and the PN offset are
77. before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value Note however that the Reference Level value ignores the Reference Level Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle To determine the required offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal A positive value indicates that an attenuation took place R amp S FSW increa ses the displayed power values a negative value indicates an external gain R amp S FSW decreases the displayed power values The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 181 Unit Reference Level For CDA measurements the unit should not be changed as this would lead to useless results Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the fullscale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal com pression clipping and overload conditions are minimized ee User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 80 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration EENEG Code Domain Analysis In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal refer
78. cable with BNC connectors 3 Connect the external trigger input on the front panel of the R amp S FSW TRIGGER INPUT to the external trigger output on the front panel of the R amp S SMU TRIGOUT1 of PAR DATA Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET FREQ 878 49 MHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD 1xEV DO DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD A ov ocv JS co qe DIGITAL STD 1xEV DO STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 PRESET 2 MODE gt 1xEV DO BTS 3 AMPT Reference level 10 dBm 4 FREQ gt Center frequency 878 49 MHz EE EE EE AE N AE e 1 EE E User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 141 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples REENERT Meas 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor 5 TRIG gt External Trigger 1 6 MEAS CONFIG Display Config Composite EVM Window 2 replacing Result Summary 7 AUTO SET gt Auto Scale All The following results are displayed the first window shows the diagram of the Com posite EVM measurement result In the second window the General Result Sum mary is displayed The Slot Results show the numeric results of the Code Domain Power measurement including the values for the Composite EVM MultiView SS Spectrum 1xEV DO BTS Ref Level 878 49 MHz Channel 0 32 Code Power Relative 10dB Slot 0of3 Channel Type All SubtypeO 1 TRG EXT1 1 Composite EVM Slot 0 1 Slot 2 Resul
79. coupled by alternating current AC or direct current DC This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 161 Impedance The reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 O or 75 Q 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This value also affects the unit conversion see Reference Level on page 80 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 67 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration mE E E O NNNRNU Code Domain Analysis This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For analog baseband input an impedance of 50 Q is always used Remote command INPut IMPedance on pa
80. in BitReverse order Example ea Aud Ho oO Manual operation See Code Display Order on page 114 SENSe CDPower PDISplay lt Mode gt This command defines how the pilot channel power is displayed in the Result Summary In relative mode the reference power is the total power Parameters lt Mode gt ABS REL RST ABS Example CDP PDIS REL Pilot channel power is displayed in relation to the total power Manual operation See Code Power Display on page 113 SENSe CDPower PREFerence lt Power gt This command specifies the reference power for the relative power result displays e g Code Domain Power Power vs PCG Parameters lt Power gt PICH TOTal PICH The reference power is the power of the pilot channel TOTal The reference power is the total power of the signal RST PICH For further information refer to Power Reference on page 115 Example CDP PREF TOT Sets total power as reference power Manual operation See Power Reference on page 115 SENSe CDPower TPMeas lt State gt This command activates or deactivates the timing and phase offset evaluation of the channels to the pilot The results are queried using the TRAC DATA CTAB command or the CALC MARK FUNC CDP BTS RES command User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 207 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters lt State gt ON OFF
81. information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command INPut CONNector on page 161 Digital VO Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the Digital Base band Interface R amp S FSW B17 in the applications that support it They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box ee User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 68 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Configuration Code Domain Analysis Input Input Source Power Sensor Radio Frequency op Input Setting Digital IQ Input Sample Rate 10 0 MHz Adjust Reference Level VG e IQR 100 101165 Digital IQ OUT Sample Rate 10 MHz Full Scale Level 10 dBm For more information see the R amp S FSW VO Analyzer and VO Input User Manual Biel Eed ed do RE H aged AE N 69 Input Sample ale ESEG SEE Rer Hex Rer AS ER atn ee Ernest e ER aeu aequa 69 Pll Sale bevel Em 69 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level 70 Connected IS RS OR RE EA EE 70 ode M 70 Digital VO Input State Enables or disable the use of the Digital IQ input source for measurements Digital IQ is only available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 163 Input Sample Rate Defines the sample rate of the digital VO signal source This sample rate must correspond with the sample rate provi
82. known then fewer possibilities have to be tested This increases the measurement speed Test setup 1 2 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSW Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors Connect the external trigger input on the front panel of the R amp S FSW TRIGGER INPUT to the external trigger output on the front panel of the R amp S SMU TRIGOUT1 of PAR DATA Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 oN Oo a b EO N PRESET FREQ 878 49 MHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD 1xEV DO DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD DIGITAL STD gt 1xEV DO gt STATE ON TRIG Marker 1 PN Sequence Period Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 2 3 4 5 PRESET MODE gt 1xEV DO BTS AMPT gt Reference level 10 dBm FREQ gt Center frequency 878 49 MHz TRIG External Trigger 1 The following results are displayed the first window shows the power of the code domain of the signal Compared to the measurement without an external trigger see figure 10 4 the repetition rate of the measurement increases In the second window the General Result Summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the code domain power measurement including the frequency error The Trigger to Frame shows the
83. on page 198 Mapping Branch onto which the channel is mapped I or Q The setting is not editable since the standard specifies the channel assignment for each channel For more information see chapter 4 7 Code Mapping and Branches on page 48 Remote command SENSe CDPower MAPPing on page 209 Status Indicates the channel status Codes that are not assigned are marked as inactive chan nels Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 200 Activity The decimal number interpreted as a binary number in 16 bits determines the half slot in which the channel is active value 1 or inactive value O Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 200 Sweep Settings The sweep settings define how the data is measured Sweep Average COURSE oe t ate er ER qun Ea up edad a Rees Ee 100 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT ccccssssscccceccssssccecceesssseceeceneessseaeeeceesssssceeeeesseseees 101 SINGIS Sweep RUN SINGLE idein i edere tecti reta tcr Re Feb ed ero Ene Ee 101 Continue Single SN EE 101 Sweep Average Count Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set this value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search pr
84. on page 90 Querying the Status Registers The following commands query the status registers specific to the 1xEV DO applications In addition the 1xEV DO applications also use the standard status registers of the R amp S FSW For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote commands basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual o RST does not influence the status registers eee User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 258 R amp SEFSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Querying the Status Registers The STATus QUEStionable DIQregister is described in STATus QUEStionable DIO Register on page 168 The STATus QUEStionable SYNC register contains information on the error situation in the code domain analysis of the 1xEV DO applications The bits can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition on page 260 and STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt on page 259 Table 11 7 Status error bits in STATus QUEStionable SYNC register for 1xEV DO applications Bit No Meaning 0 This bit is not used 1 Frame Sync failed This bit is set when synchronization is not possible within the application Possible reasons e Incorrectly set frequency e Incorrectly set level e Incorrectly set PN Offset e Incorrectly set values for Invert Q e Invalid signal at input 2103 These bits are not used 4 BTS application only Preamble Current Sl
85. on the modulation type For details see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 266 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH BITS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 BTS Channel Results In the BTS application the result summary is divided into two different evaluations e Channel and code specific results e General results for the set and slot see General Results BTS application only on page 26 The Channel Results show the data of various measurements in numerical form for a specific channel 2 Result Summary Channel Results T Code Results 0 0 Fig 3 2 Channel results summary User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 21 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays REESEN Code Domain Analysis For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 16 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CRES see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 229 Channel Table The Channel Table evaluation displays the detected channels and the results of the code domain power measurement over the selected slot The analysis results for all channels are displayed 2 Channel Table 1 Cirw Channel Walsh SymRate m Power T Offs P Offs Type Ch SF ksps OK dBm ns mrad Fig 3 3 Channel Table display in the BTS application For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Paramete
86. power in the MAC channel type POFFset Phase offset in rad PPILot absolute power in the PILOT channel type PPICh Pilot power in dBm PPReamble absolute power in the PREAMBLE channel type PRRI MS application RRI power in dBm PTOTal Total power in dBm RHO RHO RHO1 BTS application RHO verai over all slots over all chips with averaging starting at the half slot limit RHO2 BTS application RHO yerai_2 over all slots over all chips with averaging starting at the quarter slot limit RHOData BTS application RHO over all half slots for the DATA area RHOMac BTS application RHO over all half slots for the MAC area RHOPilot BTS application RHO over all slots for the PILOT area RHOVerall EE M User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 231 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements pem R EE Ss Retrieving Results BTS application RHO over all half slots SFACtor Spreading factor of channel SLOT BTS application Half slot number SRATe Symbol rate in ksps TFRame Trigger to frame TOFFset Timing offset in s Example CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES PTOT Usage Query only Manual operation See BTS Channel Results on page 21 See Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power on page 22 See Composite Constellation on page 24 See Composite Data Bitstream MS application only on
87. power trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 87 See Trigger Holdoff on page 89 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trigger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 87 See Hysteresis on page 89 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower Level This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger This command is available for the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 and the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters Level Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 DBM Example TRIG LEV BB 30DBM T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 186 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements DESEN Configuring Code Domain Analysis Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 87 See Trigger Level on page 88 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that the variable INPUT OUTPUT connectors ports 2 3 must be set for use as input using the OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection command
88. results for the selected half slot User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 29 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays EG PT Code Domain Analysis e Channel results for the selected channel Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUMmary see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 229 Symbol Constellation The Symbol Constellation evaluation shows all modulated symbols of the selected channel and the selected slot The BTS application supports BPSK QPSK 8PSK 16QAM and 64QAM modulation types The modulation type itself depends on the channel type Refer to chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 266 for further information Note QPSK constellation points are located on the diagonals not x and y axis of the constellation diagram BPSK constellation points are always on the x axis 8 Symbol Constellation Fig 3 15 Symbol Constellation display in the BTS application The number of symbols is in the range from 1 to 100 depending on the symbol rate of the channel see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 266 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SCONst see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 229
89. see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 229 Composite Data Constellation MS application only This result display is only available in the MS application for subtypes 2 or 3 The Composite Data Constellation shows the channel constellation of the modulated composite data signal at symbol level The results are displayed for the special composite data channel regardless of which channel is selected 3 Composite Data Constellation Clirve Fig 3 8 Composite Data Constellation result display Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CDC see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 229 Composite EVM This result display measures the modulation accuracy It determines the error vector magnitude EVM over the total signal The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power root mean square to the power of an ideally generated reference signal Thus the EVM is shown in The diagram consists of a composite EVM for each slot The measurement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The selected slot is highlighted red You can set the number of slots in the Signal Capture settings see Number of Slots on page 92 RETE RU EE EE E SSS SSS User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 25 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays REESEN Code Domain An
90. settings concerning the trace markers lines etc for RF meas urements are identical to the analysis functions in the Spectrum application except for some special marker functions and spectrograms which are not available in 1xEV DO applications For details see the Analysis chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Ne ER EE EE N ER N OO EE 247 ME RE N NE AE REIN EO EE 248 Traces The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen In 1xEV DO applications only one trace per window can be configured for Code Domain Analysis DISPlayPWINBowensETRAGest MODE cicuta idc tan eite eroe ee he in LERRA en deae 247 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe cessere nennen nnne 248 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode RETE EE U User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 247 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 10 2 General Analysis Parameters lt Mode gt WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold
91. starts the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highligh ted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key on the front panel controls the Sequencer not indi vidual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate IMMediate on page 225 Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count without deleting the trace of the last measurement ERREUR EE N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 101 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration EENEG Code Domain Analysis While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command I
92. symbol in the modulation type being used BTS signals Due to the different PREAMBLE lengths the DATA area is shortened depending on the PREAMBLE All relationships can be seen in the following table Table 1 8 Relationship between various parameters in 1xEV DO BTS application Channel type Code Sub SF Symbol Modulation type Chips per slot Sym Bits per slot and code class type rate bols per Mapping or Mapping slot Q complex and code PILOT 5 32 38 4ksps BPSK I 96 2 192 6 6 12 MAC 6 0 1 64 192 ksps BPSK I BPSK Q 64 4 256 4 4 8 2 3 128 9 6 ksps BPSK I BPSK Q 128 2 256 2 2 4 OOK ACK I OOK ACK Q OOK NAK I OOK NAK Q PREAMBLE 5 0 1 32 38 4 ksps BPSK I Preamble length 64 4 128 8 256 16 512 16 16 32 1024 32 32 64 2 64 19 2 ksps BPSK I Preamble length 64 1 1 128 2 2 256 4 4 512 8 8 16 1024 16 16 32 3 128 9 6 ksps BPSK I or BPSK Preamble length Q 64 0 5 0 5 1 128 1 1 2 256 2 2 4 512 4 4 8 1024 8 8 16 DATA 4 0 1 2 16 76 8 ksps QPSK 8 PSK 400 4 Mapping always complex 16 QAM PreambleChips Modulation type DataNettoChips E N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 266 R amp S FSW 84 K85 REENERT Reference Supported Bandclasses Annex A 3 Table 1 10 Relationship between modulation typ
93. that define the lt x2 gt lt y2 gt Zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 104 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 221 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 7 3 2 Configuring the Result Display DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 104 See Restore Original Display on page 104 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 104 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA cessere nne 222 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple zo0omz GTATe nn 223 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm re 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define the lt x2 gt lt
94. the name and index of all active windows from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt Windowlndex Example Usage string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index numeric value Index of the window LAY CAT Result zt E tud Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window EE EE EE EE EE SSS SF User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 217 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements EE Configuring the Result Display Return values Windowlndex Index number of the window Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowT ype gt This command replaces the wind
95. the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division For example 10 dB in the Code Domain Power result display DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level With a reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 180 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements DESEN Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 0 dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 80 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST Alle Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Reference Level on page 80 See Shifting the Display Offset on page 80 INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the preamplifier on and off The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usa
96. the table Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table Creates a completely new channel table according to the current measurement data Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 154 Sorting the Table Sorts the channel table entries Cancelling the Configuration Closes the Channel Table dialog box without saving the changes Saving the Table Saves the changes to the table and closes the Channel Table dialog box BTS Channel Details Channel details are configured in the Channel Table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Copy or Edit buttons for a predefined channel table in the Channel Detection dialog box e Channel Detection Add Channel Name DO16QAM Comment 1xEV DO standard table Delete Channel Domain Measure Table Conflict Power Walsh Sym Rate Modulation dB State Ch SF ksps Sort Table For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 16 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 97 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration EENEG Code Domain Analysis eur WY RE RO OE EE 98 Channel Number Walsh EA ote oo Fere ads eet gee ee ee 98 dsl vs ER AR EA AE EE 98 Lusso AO RA EE AE EE 98 ig ER Ee aa a aa a EE 98 EER EE ER EE EE EE OE EE 98 Is up obser MEME P 98 Channel Type Type of channel according to 1xEV DO standard For a list of possible channel types see chapter 4 4
97. until synchronization was successful If none of the methods was successful a failed synchronization is reported PILot For frame synchronization this method uses the correlation char acteristic of the known pilot channel i e pilot channel sequence spreading code including scrambling sequence AUXiliary Pilot Similar to synchronization on pilot but with the different known sequence spreading code of the auxiliary pilot channel POWer This frame synchronization method does not require a pilot chan nel because it analyzes the power of any specified channel cur rently code 3 with spreading factor 4 which is the data channel 2 RST PILot See Sync To on page 93 11 5 7 Channel Detection The channel detection settings determine which channels are found in the input signal The commands for working with channel tables are described here When the channel type is required as a parameter by a remote command or provided as a result for a remote query the following abbreviations and assignments to a numeric value are used Table 11 2 BTS channel types and their assignment to a numeric parameter value Parameter Channel type 0 PILOT 1 MAC 2 PREAMBLE 64 chips 3 PREAMBLE 128 chips 4 PREAMBLE 256 chips 5 PREAMBLE 512 chips 6 PREAMBLE 1024 chips 7 DATA Table 11 3 MS channel types and their assignment to a numeric parameter value Parameter Channel type 0 P
98. will analyze Input settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Some settings are also available in the Amplitude tab of the Amplitude dialog box e Radio Frequency PAL sers RR RA on Ee het SERE hne ex nen Roe deni Wee Ed ee 66 e Digital Me Input SetllbitjS EE OE EE 68 Analog Baseband Input Setlngs EES tace nere eee sicnt cc ever cunda 70 8 po oM E 73 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FSW is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector on the front panel of the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 66 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration Code Domain Analysis Leem a Input cH NAA SR Gnartrim MCA Input Source Power Sensor Probes Frequency External Input Coupling Mixer Impedance Digital I 9 Q High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Analog YIG Presclector Off Baseband Input Connector e Baseband Input I Radio Frequency State riti ott deser pe et adc d e Rd Lact dei rana cde d ds tae 67 PVA HE eroe s E EE 9 67 DEE E REESE 67 High FP ass Fler Tao GI OE der nire td citet edet e ed Itt pad 68 dIE as SIC CUO ME 68 put COMMOCIOR M 68 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 163 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be
99. y2 gt zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range O to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 104 EE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 222 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements SEE a a ass ses ee ee ee 11 8 Starting a Measurement DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom win dows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 104 See Restore Original Display on page 104 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 104 Starting a Measurement The measurement is started immediately when an 1xEV DO application is activated however you can stop and start a new measurement any time Diog rm EE OE EN RE N ER OE OR EE EE N 223 INiTiate ee 224 MITE ee ON Nee DEE 225 INI Tate EE 225 Nimate SEQUE EE 226 el ele TE EE 226 INITiate SEQuencer MODE c sccccseeccecseenecesceccceacctesecccansececaestiedscecaneteseasecctansecenes 226 INITiate SEQuencer REFRESA IALE essens se ER ESE eei eo ta cero eere band ER 227 SYSTem SEQUOGC E iie dacs se SS aa WES ESRA Ee SR don rendi adum De died eaae a naque qnn EEA SR
100. 0 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters Index1 The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right corner of the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the figure above to the left Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any com bination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 219 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements
101. 08 262 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Annex Predefined Channel Tables A Annex A 1 Predefined Channel Tables Predefined channel tables offer access to a quick configuration for the channel search The 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option provides the following set of channel tables com pliant with the 1xEV DO specification DOQPSK Channel table with channel types PILOT MAC PREAMBLE DATA with modulation type QPSK in channel type DATA and the following listed active codes in channel types DO8PSK Channel table with channel types PILOT MAC PREAMBLE DATA with modulation type 8 PSK in channel type DATA and the following listed active codes in channel types DO16QAM Channel table with channel types PILOT MAC PREAMBLE DATA with modulation type 16 QAM in channel type DATA and the following listed active codes in channel types DO_IDLE Channel table with channel types PILOT MAC known as IDLE slot since it does not contain any active channels in the DATA channel type PICH MS application only Channel table with the pilot channel as it exists in Access mode at least during the first slot 16 PICHRRI MS application only Channel table with pilot channel and RRI with the name PICHRRI The channels are active on the same code but at different times If the RRI and the PICH are active it is assumed that for the first 256 chips 1 4 of the half slot 1 8 of the entire slot only the RRI and then the PICH is active in this half slot
102. 0DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 50 dBm to 10 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm TRIGger SEQuence LEVel ViDeo Level This command defines the level the video signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters Level Range O PCT to 100 PCT RST 50 PCT Example TRIG LEV VID 50PCT TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe Type For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Parameters Type POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 87 See Slope on page 89 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source Note on external triggers User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 188 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Configu
103. 1 EIDEN 68 Hysteresis Lower Auto level ees Gee ee ke ee 103 Trigger 89 Upper Auto level ese ee Gee ee ke ee 103 l VO data Export file binary data description 272 Export file parameter description 269 EXPOMING 5 EE EE EEee 55 58 Exporting remote 255 Importing 56 58 Importing Exporting ra DOD Importing remote enorm tenere 255 VO Power Trigger level remote ee ke ke 187 IF Power Trigger softkey ese ke essen Trigger level remote Impedance ue 162 Setting Importing eier 55 VO data 55 56 58 269 VOdata remote nier rennen 255 ro ii AAR EE EE 56 Inactive channels lao AAR EE t 17 Inactive Channel Threshold ssss 94 197 Input Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 70 Connector remote esses 161 Coupling sss es 67 Coupling remote Digital Baseband Interface B17 settings 68 Overload remote ee 160 Dig Ew 67 Settings re 66 82 Source Analog Baseband e T1 Source connection errors 168 Source digital 1 Q 69 Source Radio frequency RF 66 Source Configuration softkey 66 Input sample rate ISR Digital UO UE
104. 173 9340 02 08 104 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration 6 3 6 3 1 RF Measurements Deactivates zoom mode tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 222 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 223 for each multiple zoom window RF Measurements 1xEV DO measurements require special applications on the R amp S FSW which you acti vate using the MODE key on the front panel When you activate a measurement channel in 1xEV DO applications Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is started automatically However the 1xEV DO applications also provide various RF measurement types Selecting the measurement type p To select an RF measurement type do one of the following e Tap the Overview softkey In the Overview tap the Select Measurement button Select the required measurement e Press the MEAS key on the front panel In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement Some parameters are set automatically according to the 1xEV DO standard the first time a measurement is selected since the last PRESET operation A list of these parameters is given with each measurement type The parameters can be changed but are not reset automatically the next time you re enter the measurement The main measurement configuration menus for the RF measurements are identical to t
105. 2288 MHz by vertical blue lines labeled with the application name Analysis interval However the individual result displays of the application need not analyze the complete data range The data range that is actually analyzed by the individual result display is referred to as the analysis interval In the 1xEV DO BTS application the analysis interval is automatically determined accord ing to the selected channel slot or set to analyze which is defined for the evaluation range depending on the result display The analysis interval can not be edited directly in the 1xEV DO BTS application but is changed automatically when you change the evaluation range Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard radio signals is how each data chan nel is correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced in firmware version 1 60 The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the mea surement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit diagrams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In
106. 266 In addition the output depends on the mapping settings The output is either the branch the Q branch or the complex signal Value Description code number code number within the channel error power value of the composite EVM power ID type of power detection 0 inactive channel 1 active channel The Hadamard or BitReverse order is important for sorting the channels but not for the number of values With Hadamard the individual codes are output in ascending order With BitReverse codes which belong to a particular channel are adjacent to each other Since an error power is output for Code Domain Error Power consolidation of the power values is not appropriate The number of codes that are output therefore generally cor responds to the base spreading factor 11 9 3 4 Code Domain Error Power MS application The command returns four values for each channel code class code number error power power ID Value Description code class code class of the channel see table 11 3 code number code number of the channel User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 237 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements aa a ae eed 11 9 3 5 Retrieving Results Value Description lt signal level gt error power in dB lt power ID gt type of power detection 0 inactive channel 1 active channel 3 quasi inactiv
107. 9 z Channel 0 32 Code Power 10 0 dBm Att B Slot Oof3 Channel Type SubtypeO 1 1 Code Domain Power I Branch Code 31 1 Cirw Ch Slot Results Set 0 Slot 0 ower Pilot f Po D i Do Fig 10 3 Meas 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error Synchronization of the reference frequencies The frequency error can be reduced by synchronizing the transmitter and the receiver to the same reference frequency gt SETUP gt Reference gt External Reference Again the first window shows the Code Domain Power measurement and the second window contains the General Result Summary After the reference frequencies of the devices have been synchronized the frequency error should be smaller than 10 Hz User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 137 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples REESEN Meas 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power MultiView SS Spectrum 3 1xEV DO BTS Ref Level 10 00dBm Freq 87 z Channel Code Power Relative Att B Slot o Channel Type PILOT SubtypeO 1 1 Code Domain Power I Branch 2 ode Fig 10 4 Meas 3 Reducing the Freguency Error by synchronizing the devices Behavior with deviating center freguency setting A measurement can only be valid if the center freguency of the DUT and the analyzer are balanced 1 On the signal generator change the center frequency in steps of 0 1 kHz and observe the analyzer display Up to a frequency error of
108. A 3 JTACS Band 2832 MHz and lt 834 MHz 2838 MHz and lt 846 MHz 2860 MHz and x 895 MHz 3B 21 JTACS Band 2810 MHz and s 860 MHz except 2832 MHz and s 834 MHz 2838 MHz and lt 846 MHz 3C 22 JTACS Band 810 MHz and gt 895 MHz 4 4 Korean PCS Band 5 5 450 MHz NMT Band 6 6 2 GHz IMT 2000 Band 7 7 700 MHz Band 8 8 1800 MHz Band 9 9 900 MHz Band 10 10 Secondary 800 MHz 11 11 400 MHz European PAMR Band 12 12 800 MHz PAMR Band 13 13 2 5 GHz IMT 2000 Extension Band 14 14 US PCS 1 9 GHz Band 15 15 AWS Band 16 16 US 2 5 GHz Band 17 17 US 2 5 GHz Forward Link Only Band AA Reference VO Data File Format iq tar VO data is stored in a compressed format with the file extension ig tar An ig tar file contains VO data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 268 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Annex A 4 1 Reference VO Data File Format iq tar and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate UO data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the VO data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data Contained files An iq tar file must contain the following files e VO parameter XML file e g xyz xml Contains meta information about the I Q data e g s
109. ATTenuation on page 182 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 183 Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 If option R amp S FSW B25 is installed you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 13 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as pos sible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenuation may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenu ation may be setto automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible EEUU RU EE EE N S EE IE e A E User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 81 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration mE E E O NNNRNU 6 2 5 3 Code Domain Analysis Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given atten
110. Analysis Trigger Source Trigger In Out Source Drop Out Time Offset Slope Rising Falling Hysteresis Holdoff External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box Trigger Source Trigger In Out Trigger 2 Input Output Type User Defined Level Tow Send Trigger IL Pulse Length 100 0 us Trigger 3 inpar For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the main R amp S FSW User Manual r rrr sar rr rrr oO User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 86 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration mE yy EIE EE EE SS Code Domain Analysis E NRI MUERTE wees neonatal deol deta ERREUR PERPE 89 0 EE 90 Hiec Pc 90 L Output Type SERT EL 90 L CNET Tr EDE EE 90 L Pulse Lengi RE nac eda Gir epidemic Fate D uud 91 E Eoo RNC 91 Trigger Source The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger Source Trigger Source Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 188 Free Run Trigger Source Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 188 Exter
111. Cc PJ ew General Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 125 See Search Next Minimum on page 126 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet
112. DIQ RANGe COUPling esses RR RR Re ee Re Re ee Re ke ee ee ee ee ee ee Re ee ee ee E User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 275 R amp S FSW 84 K85 List of Remote Commands 1xEV DO INPutDIGRANGeLUPPer Ev 166 INPut DIG RANGe UPPer AUTO RE EE tt trt theese a Gaal eta eer HEP HERE ERE ED EE 165 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer T UNIT ses see ee EE GEE tree nataan LE NEE dun reip See ctae dee tle Bee RE es PE GER Ged sed eed 166 IST Mile NEE 167 INPutDIGSRATeAUTO iio e E 167 hard ER teed 183 Jade RE DIS RR OR N EE NE OR EE M 183 INPUEEATT STATO rti RE EO RE 184 INPutFILTerHPASs STATe EEN 161 INPUtFILTErYIGESTAT virren ER AE AU AE INPUE le HERR eiat e EU d INPutIMPedance ERE OE OE EE EE INPut IQ BALanced STATe VIS Tale kv D EN E Re INPutIQ F IER BT DEER INPUtIO TYP GE INL INSTrumerit CREate DUPLicate rere ertet co ee Ge RS ei Eb ra be EE Er AEAE eek ee 151 INSTrument CREate REPLace EN INSTrument CREate E UE 151 INSTrumentDELete iss eed ese ee dee Re nennen Re AA eek ek ee ee ee seines ee AA ee ee ee ee sinere denn 152 INSTrumentllS ER ON IR E OO RE OE IE EE ON 152 INSTr rmoetnt RENGITIG eiie OE ER N ER OE OE N N EE 153 INSTrument SELE H EE 154 LAYout ADD WINDow 215 LAYout CATalog WINDOw
113. Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 74 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration Ns IE EI EE EE Code Domain Analysis Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connec tor Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port LEVel on page 191 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 190 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OT
114. Displays es RF Measurements MultiView SS Spectrum 3 1xEV DO BTS dB s SWT 100 ms 1 Occupied Bandwidth CF 878 60845 AHZ 1001 pts 420 0 kHz Span 4 2 MHz 2 Marker Table Type Ref Tre Stimulus Response Function Function Result Mi 1 878 38075 MHz 25 55 dBm T 1 8 MHz 30 52 dBm Occ Bv 2 647552448 MHz T2 1 E MHz 33 01 dBm Fig 3 21 OBW measurement results in the 1xEV DO BTS application Remote command CONF CDP MEAS OBAN see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 154 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 244 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 244 Gl CCDF The CCDF measurement determines the distribution of the signal amplitudes comple mentary cumulative distribution function The CCDF and the Crest factor are displayed For the purposes of this measurement a signal section of user definable length is recor ded continuously in the zero span and the distribution of the signal amplitudes is evalu ated IERE EE EE EE EE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 36 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays a mH 3 2 2 RF Measurements MultiView 33 Spectrum 3 1xEV DO BTS Ref Level 0 00 dBm s RBW i0 MHz Att 10dB AQT 6 25 ms 1 CCDF CF 878 608453352 MHz Mean Pwr 20 00 dB 2 Result Summary Samples 62500 Mean Peak 1 0 1 RUOLO Trace 1 0 00 dBm 0 00 dB
115. E User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 164 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements DESEN Configuring Code Domain Analysis lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sample rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indicated by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the con nected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sample rate is displayed 1 Current sample rate is displayed lt FullScaleLevel gt The level in dBm that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 if transferred from connected device If not available 9 97e37 is returned Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 0O0ut A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 Manual operation See Connected Instrument on page 70 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO State If enabled the digital input full scale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B17 is i
116. ECENT Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Manual operation See Creating a New Table on page 95 See Name on page 96 Sweep Settings Eri izicr 4900 li E 201 SENSE SR 91 M ER OER N aaa 202 SENSe AVERage COUNt lt AverageCount gt This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces In case of continuous sweeps the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep measurements the application stops the measurement and cal culates the average after the average count has been reached Parameters lt AverageCount gt If you set a average count of 0 or 1 the application performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the average count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Usage SCPI confirmed EEUU RU EE a User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 201 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements DESEN 11 5 9 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 100 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces In case of continuous sweeps the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep measurements the application stops the measurement and cal culates the average after the average c
117. EE EE a EIE Uum Code Domain Analysis Only Low IF I The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is not 0 the input signal is down converted first Low IF I Q Only Low IF Q The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT Q connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is not 0 the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q Remote command INPut IO TYPE On page 172 Input configuration Defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain UO signal via 2 simple ended lines Note Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Single ended setting must be used for all probes Differential l Q and inverse 1 Q data Single Ended Q data only Remote command INPut IQ BALanced STATe on page 171 Swap UO Activates or deactivates the inverted UO modulation If the and Q parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it On and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l Off and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 173 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency for analog bas
118. EE ER OE aS 55 Trace results remote is see ee ke ee 242 External trigger Level remote EERS se ede Eg RED ce efe 187 oi ea RE EE EE 87 F File format VO data EE N EE ae 268 Files VO data binary XML esse see ee ee 272 VO parameter XML enne nnne 269 Filters Cut off frequency sess 63 66 156 High pass remote esee 161 High pass RF input sees ee see ee 68 Multi carrier signals 48 63 65 157 Roll off factor ee ee ee 63 66 156 YIG remote see ee AA ee ek 162 Filter types Multi carrier ese ees ee Re 63 65 157 Format Data remote eret EEN EG ER Eer ee 233 Frame synchronization sees ee Re ee eeren 42 93 Free Run NG eel AE Lo EA EE 87 Freguency Configuration remote ee ke ee 177 Configuration softkey sene 77 Frequency error Measurement examples esee 136 Results remote sc ee Une Frontend GOMAQUEING DEN 77 Configuring remote ee see ee ee 176 Fullscale level Analog Baseband B71 remote control 172 Analog Baseband D 84 Full scale level Digital VQ EE ER N 69 Digital VO remote 165 166 Unit digital VO remote esses 166 H Hadamard End PR 49 114 206 Half slot OWED AA ER EE ENSURE 28 Hardware settings Displayed RE 13 High pass filter REMO isnon ANER 16
119. EE Ee 118 Channel Table Configuration eese nennen nennen RR RR nnn 119 TWACES 1 120 L Lacr m 121 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 128 Error Messages EE AE EE EE OR erue tet 128 How to Perform Measurements in 1xEV DO Applications 129 Measurement Examples eeeeeeeeeesesseeeeeeene nennen 133 Meas 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power eee 133 Meas 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask eeeeeeeee 135 Meas 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error 136 Meas 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 138 Meas 5 Measuring the Composite EVM eene enn 141 Meas 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor 142 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 145 uge H DT 145 COMMON Suffixos ecce ee ecce OR EORR 150 Activating the Measurement Channel eene 150 Selecting a Measurement EER RR KERR RE enne enne RARR EER nennen nnn nn nnn nnn 154 Configuring Code Domain Analysis RE EER KERR AE EER KERR nennen 155 Configuring RF Measurement see esse RR RR ER
120. EER RR RR ER ER RR RR Ee EER ER nennen nnn 210 Configuring the Result Display esse ee EE RE ER KERR EER R RE RE EER RR nennen ER RE 214 Starting a Measurement ee ese EE EER RE RE RR KERE RARR RR nennen KERR RE RR RR RE RR nnn 223 Retrieving Results ESE ESE RR ege 228 General GEI 247 Importing and Exporting VA Data and Results RR KEER EE Re Gee ee 255 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only 256 Querying the Status Registers ss see RE Re AAR RARR EE ERA AAR RE eR R K Re KAR Rae nennen 258 Commands for Compatibility ese esse ER ecce 261 E 263 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 4 A 1 A 2 A 3 AA Predefined Channel Tables esses KRAAK ennt nnne nnne Ee 263 Channel Type Characteristics eeueeeeesseeeeeeeesseeee nennen enne nnne 266 Reference Supported Bandclasses esee 267 Reference VO Data File Format ig tar siese ee ke RR RE RR KERR RE ERG RE EE Re Ke RE Ee 268 List of Remote Commands 1xEV DO sees ee ee RE EE 274 et E 279 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Preface About this Manual 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This R amp S FSW K84 K85 User Manual provides all the information specific to the 1xEV DO applications All general instrument functions and settings common to all applica tions and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FSW User Man
121. EN SEENEN Ge GENE Re ENNEN ER ERG ED de Ke 257 CALCulate MSRA ALING WALUe is EER eve tie RE Ed in GEE SE EE RS eee eua tee ee EEN EN 257 CALCulate MSRA WINDowesnIVAL ees sees ee se ee EE ee Re ee EE ee eek EE ee AE EE ee ee Ee ee ee EE 257 INITIEIE BEE REED cU 258 SENSe MSRACCAP Ture PF ER RE 258 CALCulate MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON CALCulate MSRA ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s CALCulate MSRA WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the index lt n gt This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in
122. ER ENE Ge AASL 242 EORMEEDEXPOrBSEPAFIOP ee ue eg See es ig eb etre SEENEN 242 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe Trace lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file Trace export is only available for RF measurements For details on the file format see Reference ASCII File Export Format in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt Trace gt Number of the trace to be stored lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 TEST ASC Stores trace 3 from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Usage SCPI confirmed FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format LEE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 242 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 9 5 Retrieving Results Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Retrieving RF Results The following commands retrieve the results of the 1XxEV DO RF measurements Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere cCALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 232 Remote commands exclusive to GAEGulate EIMIESKSSPAI iaa es gs sae
123. Ee 227 ABORt This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measurement has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAI command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INI Tiate SEQuencer ABORt on page 226 command Note on blocked remote control programs _LL_E____ N EE EE EE SSSR User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 223 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements VEER GEE EE I si Starting a Measurement If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel GPIB LAN or other interface to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must interrupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depending on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote
124. FSW 84 K85 Configuration a a Code Domain Analysis L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 80 impera de N RE 81 L Attenuation Mode Value ee ee see see ee ee Rek ee ee oe ee ee ee ee ee ee ek ee ee ge 81 Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 tentent nennen REK GR 81 pierde uie ES 82 L Preamplifier option B34A 82 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the R amp S FSW hardware is adapted according to this value it is recommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Note that the Reference Level value ignores the Shifting the Display Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel on page 180 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified
125. I e ON OFF keying NACK on the Q branch OOKN Q recognized as an ON OFF keying modulation If both bits contain 1 ON the modulation is identical to a BPSK and is recognized as BPSK If both bits contain 0 OFF there is no power within that code and slot and therefore no modulation is detected If the eval uation is set to MAPPING COMPLEX the separate and Q branch detection within the result summary is no longer selected and the modulation type is a 2BPSK with the coding number 5 via remote D If the 2 bits within an ON OFF keying modulation are identical the modulation cannot be In the MS application as of subtype 2 the new modulation types B4 Q4 Q2 Q4Q2 and E4E2 are supported RETE RU RA I E e EE 1LLLLLLLLLLLL LI AALUALL LLLZZAX User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 47 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics Multi Carrier Mode In both R amp S FSW 1xEV DO applications a special multi carrier mode is available see below and channels using the new modulation types can be detected As of subtype 3 the additional modulation type 64QAM can be used For BTS signals the MAC RA channel occupies a variable code number and the preamble occupies the l and the Q branch 4 6 Multi Carrier Mode The 1xEV DO applications can filter out and analyze one carrier out of a multi carrier signal if a special multi carrier mode is activated in the signal description Two filter types used to select the required carrier fro
126. ICH 1 RRI User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 194 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements i EE N es ee I 11 5 7 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameter Channel type 2 DATA 3 ACK 4 DRC 5 INACTIVE 6 DSC 7 Auxiliary pilot e General Channel Detection and Channel Table Management 195 e Configuring Channel Tables itr en eh tn SE Renee uten oaa dec enhn 198 General Channel Detection and Channel Table Management The following commands configure how channels are detected and channel tables are managed CONFloure CDbower BITGlCTAbBleCATalog nnne nnne nnn 195 CGoONFigure CDPower BTSECTABIe OODY iate degere zoe on cadere deep anis 196 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete tute nice iste 196 CONFigure CDPower BTSICTABIe RESTore eed ee ee dees eek se se ee ee ee ee ee entente 197 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SEL Ct dese es se se se ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Ge ee AR ER ER ER ee ee 197 CONFIgure CDPower BTSICTABIe STATE ien es ENE EE ANENE EG de GAN AA RE Ede ee ee Eg 197 SENSE CDPOwerICTRES NOE OE EE EE EO OE EE dase 197 CONFigure C DPower BTS CTABle CATalog This command reads out the names of all channel tables stored on the instrument The first two result values are global values for all channel tables the subsequent values are listed for each individual table Return values lt TotalS
127. IM PVT REF MAN see CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence on page 211 Parameters lt RefLevel gt Reference level in dBm Range 200 to 200 RST 20dBm Default unit dBm Example CALC LIM PVT REF MAN Manual reference value for limit lines CALC LIM PVTime RVAL 33 5 Set manual reference value to 33 5 Manual operation See Reference Manual on page 107 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime BURSt lt State gt This command activates an automatic burst alignment to the center of the diagram Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Burst Fit on page 107 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime FREStart lt State gt If switched on this command evaluates the limit line over all results at the end of a single sweep The sweep is restarted if this result is FAILED User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 212 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements aa SEE a es el 11 6 2 Configuring RF Measurements Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP PVT FRES ON Restarts a single sweep if the result evaluation is failed Manual operation See Restart on Fail on page 107 CONFigure CDPower BTS RFSLot Slot Defines the expected signal The limit lines and the borders for calculating the mean power are set accordingly Parameters Slot FULL IDLE FULL Full slot signal The lower and upper limit line
128. IT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the sweep INIT SEQ REFR Refreshes the display for all MSRA channels Event SYSTem SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 227 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements a 9 9 wn Retrieving Results Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF 11 9 Retrieving Results The following commands retrieve the results from a 1xEV DO measurement in a remote environment When the channel type is required as a parameter by a remote command or provided as a resul
129. If only the PICH is active RRI activity 0 the PICH is active for the entire 1024 chips of the half slot 5CHANS MS application only Channel table with 5 channels PICH RRI DRC ACK DATA Table 1 1 Base station channel table DOQPSK with QPSK modulation in DATA area Channel Type No of Chan Code Channel Modulation Mapping nels Walsh Code SF Pilot 1 0 32 BPSK I Mac 5 2 64 RA BPSK I 3 64 BPSK I 4 64 BPSK I 34 64 BPSK O 35 64 BPSK O User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 263 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Annex Predefined Channel Tables Channel Type No of Chan Code Channel Modulation Mapping nels Walsh Code SF Preamble 64 1 3 32 BPSK I chips long Data 16 0 16 OPSK 1 16 OPSK 2 16 OPSK 13 16 OPSK 14 16 OPSK 15 16 OPSK Table 1 2 Base station channel table DO8PSK with 8 PSK modulation in DATA area Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Pilot 1 0 32 BPSK I Mac 5 2 64 RA BPSK I 3 64 BPSK I 4 64 BPSK I 34 64 BPSK O 35 64 BPSK Q Preamble 64 chips long 1 3 32 BPSK I Data 16 0 16 8 PSK 1 16 8 PSK 2 16 8 PSK 13 16 8 PSK 14 16 8 PSK 15 16 8 PSK Table 1 3 Base station channel table DO16QAM with 16QAM modulation in DATA area Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Pilot 1 0 32 BPSK I Mac 5 2 64 RA BPSK I 3 64 BPSK I 4 64 BPSK I 34 64 BPSK Q 35 64 BPSK Q
130. LCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 229 EE EE EE EE AE N AE e 1 EE 1 L 1 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLUUILAALLUISSSEX User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 26 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays REESEN Code Domain Analysis Peak Code Domain Error The Peak Code Domain Error is defined as the maximum value for the Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power for all codes Thus the error between the measure ment signal and the ideal reference signal is projected onto the code domain at a specific base spreading factor In the diagram each bar of the x axis represents one slot The y axis represents the error power The measurement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The currently selected slot is highlighted red You can select the Number of Sets and the number of evaluated slots in the Signal Capture settings see chapter 6 2 7 Signal Capture Data Acquisition on page 91 MS application the error is calculated only for the selected branch I or Q 1 Peak Code Domain Error eia Fig 3 11 Peak Code Domain Error display in the BTS application Note Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal refer ence signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal is very large The result display therefore shows a pe
131. MSRA ie ee ee ee AA Re AA nennen nennen nnne erret ee 92 e Synchronization MS application E EE SES KERK ASe Ke Ke ek ek RR 93 Channel Detection RR RE RR EESEAE 93 EE onc de os AA EE OR OE 100 ee e E 102 200M FUNCIONS EE 104 Default Settings for Code Domain Analysis When you activate a 1xEV DO application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application e center frequency and frequency offset e reference level and reference level offset e attenuation e Signal source and digital UO input settings e input coupling e YIG filter state After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily Apart from these settings the following default settings are activated directly after a 1xEV DO application is activated or after a Preset Channel The following default settings of the Code Domain Analysis are activated Configuration Overview Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus E User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 59 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration Code Domain Analysis Code Power Relativ Ref Level Source Att Level
132. Me Em 115 Code Display Order Defines the sorting of the channels for the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error result displays For further details on the code order refer to chapter 4 8 Code Display and Sort Order on page 49 Hadamard By default the codes are sorted in Hadamard order i e in ascending order The power of each code is displayed there is no visible distinction between channels If a channel covers several codes the display shows the individual power of each code Bit Reverse Bundles the channels with concentrated codes i e all codes of a chan nel are next to one another Thus you can see the total power of a concentrated channel Remote command SENSe CDPower ORDer on page 206 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 114 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Analysis Code Domain Analysis Settings MS application Compensate IQ Offset If enabled the UO offset is eliminated from the measured signal This is useful to deduct a DC offset to the baseband caused by the DUT thus improving the EVM Note however that for EVM measurements according to standard compensation must be disabled Remote command SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 206 Timing and phase offset calculation Activates or deactivates the timing and phase offset calculation of the channels to the pilot channel If deactivated or if more than 50 active channels are in the signal the calculation does not take place and dashes are displayed i
133. NITiate CONMeas on page 224 6 2 12 Automatic Settings Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings In order to do so a measurement is performed The duration of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the following automatic settings are not available as they require a new data acquisition However 1xEV DO applications cannot perform data acquisition in MSRA operating mode Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All 102 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level esses 102 Auto Seale WNAOW teed 103 PUG Skale A oa ceca ee 103 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto 103 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual 103 Upper Level Hvsteresis EEN 103 Lower Level AE AR ME EE AR ER N aod anaes 103 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto AII Activates all automatic adjustment functions for the current measurement settings This includes e Auto Leve
134. NSe FREQuency OFFSet Offset This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not O Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 78 Parameters Offset Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 78 Amplitude and Scaling Settings Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere INPut COUPling on page 161 INPut IMPedance on page 162 SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 205 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONE 179 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MAXimum se ee ee AA nennen enne 179 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MINimum eese 180 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe PDlVision esses 180 bDISPlayEWINDowesns T RACS Y SCALe RLEWVMS 222 nn on nca onn ote eren acu ecu 180 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet sees 181 INPUEGAINSTA E e m 181 ded ztae ilH RE ER OE EE EE N 181 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switched off again Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Au
135. Number of active channels CDERms MS application RMS value of EVM error vector magnitude of composite data channel CDEPeak MS application Peak value of EVM error vector magnitude of composite data channel CDPabsolute Channel power absolute in dBm CDPRelative Channel power relative in dB relative to total or PICH power refer to CDP PREF command CERRor Chip rate error in ppm CHANnel Channel number CODMulation MS application modulation type of the composite data channel CODPower MS application power of the composite data channel DACTive Number of active Data channels DMTYpe Data Mode Type DRPich MS application Delta RRI PICH in dB EVMPeak Error vector mag peak in EVMRms Error vector magnitude RMS in FERPpm Frequency error in ppm FERRor Frequency error in Hz IPMMax Maximum power level in inactive MAC channel in dB IQIMbalance IQ imbalance in 96 IQOFfset IQ offset in 96 MACCuracy User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 230 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements a al gt Retrieving Results Composite EVM in MACTive BTS application number of active MAC channels MTYPe Modulation type including mapping PCDerror Peak code domain error in dB PDATa absolute power in the DATA channel type PDMax Maximum power level in Data channel PDMin Minimum power level in Data channel PLENGth Length of preamble in chips PMAC absolute
136. ONFigure CDPower MS Signal Description BTS MCARrier FII Configuration Code Domain Analysis LTer TYPE on page 157 LTer COFRequency on page 156 These settings describe the input signal in MS measurements 0 16 Code Pd Common Subtype Long Code Mask I Long Code Mask Q Multi Carrier Multi Carrier Enhanced Algorithm Multi Carrier Filter Filter Type Roll Off Factor Cut Off Frequency Relative L Enhanced AIDOUIPIOL iss aae a Lee eod ERE El ib ets 65 L Multi Carrier Filter ees ee ee ee ee ee ee tnt nnn tnnt 65 ENS DIES SE RRP ee EE 65 BAL B Plo RA N N T 66 L Cut Off Ereouencn 66 Subtype Specifies the characteristics of the used transmission standard For details see chapter 4 5 Subtypes on page 47 0 1 2 Single carrier Increased number of active users User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 64 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration mE OG G e Code Domain Analysis 3 Modulation type 64QAM can be detected Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS SUBType on page 158 Long Code Mask Long Code Mask Q Defines the long code mask for each branch of the mobile in hexadecimal form The value range is from 0 to 4FFFFFFFFFF For more information on long codes see Long code scrambling on page 42 Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe I on page 159 SENSe CDPow
137. OS EE OR 173 e Configuring the ef c nde i teo Ee KEER Gee ER De Gee Ke Ee 176 RF Input INPut KTTenuation PRO T clion RESGU icono Lee Ene needed ere ee i Enn et bae 160 Eelst al 161 INPRO OUP ING co geared E 161 INPut FIL Fes HPASSESTATe riesen se ENS AE KEN a AE 161 INPURFIL Fete det Cm 162 dc stis oro NN 162 l unico E 163 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared For details on the status register see the R amp S FSW User Manual EEUU RU EE N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 160 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements DESEN Configuring Code Domain Analysis The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first Usage Event INPut CONNector lt ConnType gt Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF input connector or the optional Analog Baseband connector This command is only available if the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and VO Input User Manual Parameters lt CouplingType gt RF RF input connector AIQI Analog Baseband
138. R amp SSFSW 84 K85 1xEV DO Measurements ser Manual Data Mode Active 1173 9340 02 08 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S9FSW models with firmware version 1 70 and higher e R amp S FSW8 1312 8000K08 e R amp S FSW13 1312 8000K13 e R amp S FSW26 1312 8000K26 R amp S FSW43 1312 8000K43 e R amp S FSW50 1312 8000K50 The following firmware options are described e R amp S FSW K84 1313 1480 02 e R amp S FSW K85 1313 1497 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2013 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Printed in Germany Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW R amp S FSW 84 K85 Contents Contents Me PEA c
139. RAN Eer Re Di reas 256 MMEMGYS TOREIO STATE ie esse IE VERG a AE se ks a E Pe SE BA Rg wo ENE 256 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores VO data from a file The file extension is iq tar Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation See Import on page 56 See IQ Import on page 56 T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 255 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 12 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only MMEMory STORe IQ COMMent Comment This command adds a comment to a file that contains VO data Parameters Comment String containing the comment Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See Export on page 55 See IQ Export on page 55 MMEMory STORe IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured VO data to a file The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig t
140. REQ CENT Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instan ces of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a measurement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets n next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compliance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both
141. RS Se ee GR ee Ro eo aaa eee eaae Roue nena dece caa be ee de Se 243 CALCulate MARKerFUNCton POWerRESUI ee ee ee ee se ee ee ee EE ee Ee ee ee Ee ee ee ee s 244 GALEUIBIESTATISHGSRES UIER E 246 CONFigur CDPower BTS PV Time ISTRESUR EERS see EE AR SEG NSS KERKREG Ge ee sess 246 CALCulate LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check Note that for SEM measurements the limit line suffix lt k gt is irrelevant as only one specific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INIT Tiate CONTinuous on page 225 Return values Result 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 34 RETE RU RE N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 243 Retrieving Results CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult Measurement This command queries the results of power measurements To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also 1N1Tiate CONTinuous on page 225 R am
142. Re ee 154 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e starts a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement settings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a con secutive number e g Spectrum gt Spectrum 2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA Master channel is selected Example INST SEL Spectrum INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named Spectrum and creates a new mea surement channel named Spectrum 2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see table 11 1 Example INST CRE SAN Spectrum 2 Adds an additional spectrum display named Spectrum 2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt Chann
143. S CTABle SELect on page 197 command For a detailed description of the parameters refer to chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Param eters on page 16 T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 198 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Parameters ChannelType lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt Modulation gt lt Reserved1 gt lt Reserved2 gt lt Status gt lt CDPRelative gt Example Manual operation Configuring Code Domain Analysis The channel type is numerically coded as follows 0 PILOT 1 MAC 2 PREAMBLE with 64 chip length 3 PREAMBLE with 128 chip length 4 PREAMBLE with 256 chip length 5 PREAMBLE with 512 chip length 6 PREAMBLE with 1024 chip length 7 DATA Depending on channel type the following values are allowed PILOT 5 MAC 6 PREAMBLE 5 DATA 4 spreading factor 2code class 0 spreading factor 1 Modulation type including mapping 0 BPSK I 1 BPSK Q 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16 QAM Modulation types QPSK 8 PSK 16 QAM have complex values Always 0 reserved Always 0 reserved 0 inactive 1 active Can be used in a setting command to disable a channel tempo rarily Power value in dB CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Selects channel table for editing If a channel table with this name does not exist a new channel table is created CONF CDP CTAB DATA 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 10 5 3 4 0 0 1 0 0 Defines a table w
144. SR Ez User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 84 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Configuration m H n co ARGENT Code Domain Analysis 6 2 5 4 Y Axis Scaling The vertical axis scaling is configurable In Code Domain Analysis the y axis usually displays the measured power levels bann 0 0 dB Aie eS 70 0 dB Auto Scale Once 1 iser 1 Code Domain Power Y Maximum amp ll ie OO OR OO enirn rk b nk I rir d t e nene deren 85 Auto Scale ONCE EE 85 Y Maximum Y Minimum Defines the amplitude range to be displayed on the y axis of the evaluation diagrams Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe MAXimum on page 179 DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe MINimum on page 180 Auto Scale Once Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be displayed for the current measurement settings The display is only set once it is not adapted further if the measurement settings are changed again Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 179 6 2 6 Trigger Settings Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Trigger settings can be configured via the TRIG key or in the Trigger dialog box which is displayed when you select the Trigger button in the Overview User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 85 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration Code Domain
145. SW Thus you can configure one channel for a Code Domain Analysis for example and another for a Power measurement for the same input signal Then you can use the Sequencer to perform all measurements consecutively and switch through the results easily or monitor all results at the same time in the MultiView tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual Selecting the measurement type When you activate a measurement channel in a 1xEV DO application Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is started automatically However the 1xEV DO applications also provide other measurement types p To select a different measurement type do one of the following e Tap the Overview softkey In the Overview tap the Select Measurement button Select the required measurement e Press the MEAS key on the front panel In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement picante 57 Code Doman WEE 58 e RP EE EE EE OE EE id ee ee ed 105 6 1 Result Display The captured signal can be displayed using various evaluation methods All evaluation methods available for 1xEV DO applications are displayed in the evaluation bar in Smart Grid mode when you do one of the following e Select the EJ SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Display button in the Overview e Press the MEAS key e Select the Display Config softkey in any 1xEV DO menu Up to 16 evaluation me
146. Slots and Sets on page 40 Remote command SENSe CDPower IQLength on page 193 Number of Sets Defines the number of consecutive sets to be captured and stored in the instrument s IQ memory The possible value range is from 1 to a maximum of 1500 BTS application or 810 MS application sets The default setting is 1 If you capture more than one set the number of slots PCGs is always 64 1xEV DO BTS application 32 and is not available for modification Remote command SENSe CDPower SET COUNt on page 193 Set to Analyze Selects a specific set for further analysis The value range is between 0 and Number of Sets on page 92 1 Remote command SENSe CDPower SET on page 210 Application Data MSRA For the 1xEV DO BTS application in MSRA operating mode the application data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal capturing in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode see Number of Sets on page 92 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 92 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration EE Code Domain Analysis In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the 1xEV DO BTS measurement see Capture Offset on page 90 The analysis interval cannot be edited manually but is determined automatically according to the selected channel slot or setto analyze which is defined for the evaluation range depend
147. W B17 The status of the STATus QUESTionable DIO register is indicated in bit 14 of the STATus QUESTionable register You can read out the state of the register with STATus QUEStionable DIO CONDition on page 169 and STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt on page 170 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 168 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements aa a Oe N eN ee ee eee Configuring Code Domain Analysis Bit No Meaning 0 Digital VO Input Device connected This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital Baseband Interface of the analyzer 1 Digital VO Input Connection Protocol in progress This bitis set while the connection between analyzer and digital baseband data signal source e g R amp S SMU R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 2 Digital VO Input Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred during establishing of the connect between analyzer and digital VO data signal source e g R amp S SMU R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 3 5 not used 6 Digital VO Input FIFO Overload This bit is set if the input transfer rate is too high 7 not used 8 Digital VO Output Device connected This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital VO Output 9 Digital VO Output Connection Protocol in progress This bit is set while the connection between analyzer and digital VO data signal source e
148. YPe on page 191 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port LEVel on page 191 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 192 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 191 EEUU RU EA I E 1 e M LLAALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLUUUUISX AX User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 75 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Configuration or H om NM RE Code Domain Analysis 6 2 4 3 Digital VO Output Settings The optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 allows you to output VO data from any R amp S FSW application that processes UO data to an external device The con figuration settings for digital VO outp
149. a marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only General Marker Settings EUH m 251 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off EEUU RU EE E 1 AE EE 1 1 LL 1 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL M User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 251 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements es m SU Q q H m H p 11 10 2 3 General Analysis Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 124 Marker Search and Positioning Settings CAL Culate lt n gt MARKer lt im gt MAXIMUMILEF T iii Es kes SEN KG EA SES GEN EER Ed OE SEN GE Ee Sk EES ER Ese Ne 252 CALCulatesn7 MARKersm MAXimum NEXT iese ee see es ee ee se see ee ee EE ee EE ee Re ee Ee ee ee eek 252 CAL Culate nz M AbkermzMAximum RICH 253 CALCulate n2 MARKer m MAXimum PEAK
150. able are considered to be active For a list of predefined channel tables provided by the 1xEV DO applications see chapter A 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 263 o Quasi inactive channels in the MS application In the MS application only one branch in the code domain is analyzed at a time see also chapter 4 7 Code Mapping and Branches on page 48 However even if the code on the analyzed branch is inactive the code with the same number on the other branch may belong to an active channel In this case the channel is indicated as quasi inac tive in the current branch evaluation User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 43 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics Channel Detection and Channel Types 4 4 1 BTS Channel Types The 1xEV DO standard defines the BTS channel types 1xEV DO forward link signals contain 4 channel types which are sent exclusively at specific times see also fig ure 4 1 e PILOT The PILOT channel type comprises 96 chips and is located in the center of each half slot It must be available in the signal for the base station signal to be detected In the PILOT channel type only the 0 32 channel on the branch is active With spreading factor 32 the BPSK I and hypothetically BPSK Q modulation are used Hypothetically because no signal should exist on the Q branch e MAC The Medium Access Control channel type is 64 chips in front of and behind the PILOT The MAC channel type contains the reverse activi
151. act RE eed rne N SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation essen ee ke ke ee ge ee nenat SENSe ADJustCONFigure DURation MODE iese ees ee ee ee ee AR ke ee Re ee ee Re Re GR ee ee Re ee enne 203 SENSe ADJustCONFigure HYSTeresis LOWEer ee eee ee ee ke ge ke ee 204 SENSe ADJustCONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer see ee de ee ke ee ee ee ee ke ee ge ee ee 204 SENSe ADJustLEVel sesse ese ee ese ee Ee ee Ee ee Ee Ge ee ee ee Ge Re GR AR ee Re ee ee Ge ee Ge ee ee ee ge ee ee SENS AVERA e COUN iiare 2 tiae OR RE OE OE OE RE Ve PE B EK SENS CDP SMODe RE AE N N EE EE N EE EE ge SENSe CDPower AVERage SEN Se SPI 7714900 tr SENSe GDPowWer C TYPO cce tet ER N EE OE er EE OE N SENSe CDPower ICTEResholdl 2 EE EE EE EE EE N ISENSe CDPow r el e LE SENSe CDPoWwerl CODE ME tene te ee atit ete e c E ded d pede ON 159 SENSe CDPower L CODe Q sse nennen ee Ge ee ee eke Re eke etre ee etr ee inrer nnne 160 SENS er We EHTK 262 dale eie dd EE ER RE N ka conan auus deca ETA 209 SENSe CDPower MMODe IEN Ge ICDPowerNObMalze uttu t ntun En tEn tEAtANEANEAEAEEAEENENAENNEAEEAEEEENEEE EEEE EAEn Ea enat 206 EE Eer e e e pn RE EE OE eens 206 SENSe CDPower ORDJr 5 OR EE OE MR 206 SENSe GDPower PDISplay SENSE ENGINE SE KEER re tete eret ein Aiea dra aV Rees ED GE we 207 SENSe CDPower PNOFfset sss nennen nre rrennet nre etn treten etre nre t eren nnne nnn en 159
152. active the command first activates the marker Usage Event T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 253 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements a o7 I H pt General Analysis Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 125 See Search Next Peak on page 126 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next
153. ae se 233 Data input m Data OUtDut daiira erena ER Se ge ree i Dek Ee 66 Data rate MS appliGatiOri i i askese RE oe RR kb ee nee Ee Ee 267 DC offset SEC Q OSC RR EE EE 113 115 Default values aI NE ER Seu tiraa 59 Delta markers Bl RE OE N 123 Delta RRI PICH N EE EE EE EO EG 16 Diagrams Evaluation method ee ee ee ee ke ke 37 Footer information ese ee cee eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee 14 Differential input Analog Baseband B71 remote control 171 Analog Baseband D 72 DiglConf Softkey see also R amp S DiglConf sss 70 Digital Baseband Interface DI 76 Connected instrument ee eect ee 77 Input settings 68 Input status remote cece cece ee RR RA ede 164 Output connection status remote 167 Output settings Status registers Digital VO Connection information esee 77 Input connection information esse ee 70 Input settings ss Ee eiecti BEE rr rre He su ates 68 Output settings us 40 Output settings information sek ee Re 76 deel oe EC 88 Digital input Connection information eee eee eeeeeeeeee 70 Digital output EE Ti 76 Display Configuration remote Configuration softkey Configuration Softkey Informati n Be DO IDLE Predefined channel table 263 265 DO16QAM Pr
154. ak code domain error that is too high Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active channel To obtain reliable measurement results select an adequate channel threshold via the Inactive Channel Threshold setting Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PCDerror see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES PCDerror see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 229 Power vs Chip BTS application only This result display shows the power for all chips in a specific slot Therefore a trace consists of 2048 power values User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 27 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays Code Domain Analysis The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single slot in the selected branch The selected slot is highlighted red Power vs Chip ei Clrw Start Sym 0 256 Chip Stop Sym 2047 Fig 3 12 Power vs Chip result display Due to the symmetric structure of the 1xEV DO forward link signal it is easy to identify which channel types in the slot have power Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PVChip see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 Power vs Halfslot MS application only This result display shows the power of the selected channel over all half slots 1 Power vs Half Slot Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PHSLot see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt
155. all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not e orange AL the line lies within the interval e white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e no AL the line lies outside the interval T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 53 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode 1 Code Domain nal Power lysis Inte Code 0 Code T COLL SAU 2 Power vs Chip For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual LEE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 54 R amp S FSW 84 K85 VO Data Import and Export Import Export Functions 5 VO Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal rep resentation that consists of two channels the in phase I and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as VO signals VO signals are useful because the specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed The complete modulation information and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be analyzed in the Uu Q baseband Importing and exporting VO signals is useful for various applications e Generating and saving VO signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in exter nal software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FSW later e Capturing and saving UO signals with
156. alysis 2 Composite EVM ei Cirve 1 Slot Fig 3 9 Composite EVM result display Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal and therefore the composite EVM is very large Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active channel To obtain reliable measurement results select an adequate channel threshold via the Inactive Channel Threshold on page 94 setting Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CEVM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES MACCuracy see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 229 General Results BTS application only In the BTS application the result summary is divided into two different evaluations e Channel and code specific results see BTS Channel Results on page 21 e General results for the set and slot The General Results show the data of various measurements in numerical form for all channels in all slots in a specific set 2 Result Summary General Results Set 0 Slot Results Set 0 Z EU f t Fig 3 10 General results summary For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 16 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH GRES see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 CA
157. amble in chips RHO RHO Quality parameter RHO According to the 1xEV DO standard RHO is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideal reference signal When RHO is measured the 1xEV DO standard requires that only the pilot channel be supplied RRI Power PRRI Power of the RRI channel in dBm Slot SLOT Slot number Total Power PTOTal Total power of the signal in dBm Channel Parameters The following parameters refer to a specific channel Table 3 3 Channel specific parameters Parameter SCPI Parame Description ter Channel Pwr Rel CDPRelative Relative dB power of the channel refers either to the pilot channel or the total power of the signal Channel Pwr Abs CDPabsolute Absolute dBm power of the channel Walsh Chan CHANnel Channel number including the spreading factor id SFACtor EE RU N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 18 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays Code Domain Analysis Phase Offset POFFset Parameter SCPI Parame Description ter Channel Type Channel type BTS application e 0 PICH e 1 RRI e 2 DATA e 3 ACK e 4 DRC e 5 INACTIVE Code Class Code class of the channel See table 11 2 and table 11 3 Code Number Code number within the channel 0 to lt SF gt 1 Composite Data CDERms MS application only EUM CDEPeak RMS or peak value of EVM error vector magnitude of composite da
158. ample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single VO parameter XML file inside an iq tar file e VO data binary file e g xyz complex float32 Contains the binary VO data of all channels There must be only one single UO data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file e VO preview XSLT file e g open IaTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the UO parameter XML file and a preview of the VO data in a web browser VO Parameter XML File Specification The content of the UO parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RsIqTar xsd In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an UO parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample VO parameter XML file xyz xml xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt gt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance gt lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt
159. an RF or baseband signal analyzer to analyze them with the R amp S FSW or an external software tool later As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values Q data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The VO data is stored in a format with the file extension iq tar For a detailed description see chapter A A Reference UO Data File Format iq tar on page 268 e lmport Export FUNGOS centre tne deeg ea ner enn t o eere E eee tte 55 5 1 Import Export Functions c The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save J Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the toolbar ET Some functions for particular data types are also available via softkeys or dialog boxes in the corresponding menus e g trace data or marker peak lists o For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSW User Manual E jo EC cae EE EE OE N EE 55 L IQ e 0 CON 55 Inge P M M U 56 BEE MONT 56 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export IQ Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process VO data such as the VO Analy
160. and phase values e Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the VO data A signal generator typically outputs the VO data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the VO data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock frequency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the VO data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following e Complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values inter leaved and Q are unitless e Real Real number unitless e Polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or float64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter A 4 2 VO Data Binary File on page 272 The following data types are allowed e int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary VO data itself has no unit To get a
161. and the Cut Off Frequency Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 157 TT User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 65 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration 6 2 4 6 2 4 1 Code Domain Analysis Roll Off Factor Filter Type Multi Carrier Defines the roll off factor of the RRC filter which defines the slope of the filter curve and therefore the excess bandwidth of the filter Possible values are between 0 01 and 0 99 in 0 01 steps The default value is 0 02 This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 157 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF on page 156 Cut Off Frequency Filter Type Multi Carrier Defines the frequency at which the passband of the RRC filter begins Possible values are between 0 1 MHz and 2 4 MHz in 1 Hz steps The default value is 1 25 MHz This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 157 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency on page 156 Data Input and Output Settings The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals e input Source ollis iere iio a tete eO dete pedit aad 66 EELER Ee EE rr N RE N 73 e Digital VO Output e EE 76 Input Source Settings The input source determines which data the R amp S FSW
162. approx 1 m BNC connector The following measurements are described e Meas 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power 133 e Meas 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask 135 e Meas 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error 136 e Meas 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 138 e Meas 5 Measuring the Composite EVM iese esse ee sk se ee Gee se ee Gee nene dann 141 e Meas 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor 142 10 1 Meas 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power In the Power measurement the total channel power of the 1xEV DO signal is displayed The measurement also displays spurious emissions like harmonics or intermodulation products that occur close to the carrier Test setup gt Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the RF input of the R amp S FSW coaxial cable with N connectors User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 133 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples EE RE EE OP EE a ASE RA ME RE EE sa Meas 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET FREQ 878 49 MHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD 1xEV DO DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD N Oo oO ho N DIGITAL STD gt 1xEV DO gt STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 PRESET MODE gt 1xEV DO BTS AMPT gt Reference level 0 dBm 2 3 4 FREQ gt Center freque
163. ar Stores the captured UO data to the specified file Manual operation See Export on page 55 See IQ Export on page 55 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the appli cation data For the 1xEV DO BTS application the application data range is defined by the same commands used to define the signal capture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode see SENSe CDPower SET COUNt on page 193 Be sure to select the correct measure ment channel before executing this command In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the application data for the 1xEV DO BTS measurement EE EE EE EE EE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 256 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only The analysis interval used by the individual result displays cannot be edited but is determined automatically However you can query the currently used analysis interval for a specific window The analysis line is displayed by default but can be hidden or re positioned Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels GAL Culate MSRASALINGS HOW orii ie scence EES SS Re AE
164. are called PVTFL PVTFU IDLE Idle slot signal The lower and upper limit line are called PVTIL PVTIU RST FULL Example CONF CDP RFSL FULL Use limit line for FULL slot and connect FULL slot signal Manual operation See RF Slot on page 106 1xEV DO SEM and ACLR Measurements CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDoGlass sess 213 CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass lt Bandclass gt This command selects the bandclass for the measurement The bandclass defines the frequency band used for ACLR and SEM measurements It also determines the corre sponding limits and ACLR channel settings according to the 1xEV DO standard Parameters lt Bandclass gt For an overview of available bandclasses and the corresponding parameter values see chapter A 3 Reference Supported Band classes on page 267 RST 0 Example CONF CDP BCL 1 Selects band class 1 1900 MHz Manual operation See Bandclass on page 109 RETREAT RU RA M User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 213 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Configuring the Result Display 11 7 Configuring the Result Display The following commands are required to configure the screen display in a remote envi ronment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 6 1 Result Display on page 57 e General Window Commengde ee EEEREEER EENEG 214 e Working with Windows in the Display 215 e Zooming into the Display
165. ary RSUMmary Result Summary CRESults Channel Results BTS mode only GRESults General Results BTS mode only XPOW CDP RATio SCONst Symbol Constellation XTIM CDP SYMB EVM SEVM Symbol EVM CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime LIST STATe lt State gt Opens a new window to display a list evaluation Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 7 2 Working with Windows in the Display on page 215 Parameters lt State gt RST ON OFF OFF SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJust This command adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Note that this command is retained for compatibility reasons only For new R amp S FSW programs use SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 205 SENSe CDPower PRESet This command resets the 1xEV DO channel to its predefined settings Any RF measure ment is aborted and the measurement type is reset to Code Domain Analysis Note that this command is retained for comaptibility reasons only For new remote control programs use the SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute command Usage Event RETE RU EE EE EE N EE EE EE EE EE AA EE User Manual 1173 9340 02
166. asurements In multi standard radio analysis you can analyze the data captured by the MSRA Master in the 1xEV DO BTS application Assuming you have detected a suspect area of the captured data in another application you would now like to analyze the same data in the 1xEV DO BTS application 1 2 3 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for Code Domain Analysis Select the Signal Capture button Define the application data range as and the Number of Sets You must determine the number of sets according to the following formula No of sets measurement time in seconds 80 ms time per set Enter the next larger integer value Define the starting point of the application data as the Capture offset The offset is calculated according to the following formula capture offset starting point for application starting point in capture buffer The analysis interval is automatically determined according to the selected channel slot or frame to analyze defined for the evaluation range depending on the result display Note that the frame slot channel is analyzed within the application data If the analysis interval does not yet show the required area of the capture buffer move through the frames slots channels in the evaluation range or correct the application data range ERREUR RU M User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 131 6 Ifthe Sequencer is off select the Refresh softkey in the Sweep me
167. ata File Format iq tar lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 0 lt float gt lt float gt 41 lt float gt lt float gt 0 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt PowerVsTime gt lt Spectrum gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 107 lt float gt lt float gt 96 lt float gt lt float gt 94 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 25 lt float gt lt float gt 1 lt float gt lt float gt 1 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt A 4 2 Q Data Binary File The VO data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed UO data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex samples for channel 1 channel 2 channel 3 etc Example NumberOfChannels Element ordering for complex cartesian data Complex data I channel no time index Q channel no time index I 0 1 0 Q 0 0 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 I 1 0 Q 1 0 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 I 2 0 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 I 0 1 Q 0 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 User Manual 1173
168. ath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 124 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Analysis e SD M A S M OS S OS MS M T T 3 Markers Auto Default Up to two markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are active the marker table is displayed automatically Remote command DISPlay MTAB1e on page 251 Marker Search Settings Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings These settings are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu or in the Search tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Then select the hori zontal Search tab e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Config tab Then select the horizontal Search tab Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Code Domain Settings Trace Marker Geleet 1 Code Domain Power Search Mode for Nest Peak SEN Eg ER Ge EE ee Re ED ee Ge Ee en ee Ee 125 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current pea
169. ation The command returns one value pair for each half slot half slot number level value in dB The number of returned value pairs corresponds to the number of captured half slots Power vs Symbol The command returns one value for each symbol value in dBm gt The number of values depends on the number of symbols and therefore the spreading factor see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 266 Power vs Time BTS application The command returns two values for each sweep point power value in dBm gt measurement time in us Result Summary Channel Results General Results BTS application The command returns 30 values for the selected channel in the following order lt FERRor gt lt FERPpm gt lt CERRor gt lt TFRame gt lt RHOPilot gt lt RHO1 gt lt RHO2 gt lt PPILot gt lt PMAC gt lt PDATa gt lt PPReamble gt lt MACCuracy gt lt DMTYpe gt lt MAC Tive gt lt DACTive gt lt PLENGth gt lt RHO gt lt PCDerror gt lt IQIMbalance gt lt IQOFfset gt lt SRATe gt lt CHANnel gt lt SFACtor gt lt TOFFset gt lt POFFset gt lt CDPRelative gt CDPab solute gt lt EVMRms gt lt EVMPeak gt lt MTYPe gt For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 16 Result Summary MS application The command returns 25 values in the following order lt SLOT gt lt PTOTal gt lt PPICh gt lt
170. available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp S DiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURce EBOX RST SOURce EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Remote commands exclusive to digital VO data input and output INPUt DIT C DE MiG e 164 INPUtBIGRANGe UPPE AUTO iis re ERENS Gee died ene ee need 165 INPUGDIORANGEEOUR IG isi ER de EE GR GRENS de etapa ee rap OE RA RE dene GREG oe 166 INPuCDIORANGet Uppert 166 INPABIORANGe UP Per KE EE 166 IR AE OES SE coves EP 167 INPUEBIGSRATEAUTO NE Cm 167 QUT PUE DIO Ee EE AE ES GE AE a Ee ee KG AD eN AE Ge 167 OUTPUR DIO CDE Vite E 167 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital VO input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For details see the section Interface Status Information for the Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 in the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device E
171. ays assigned to precisely one mobile station with 1xEV DO whereas with cdma2000 several mobile stations communicate with the base station simultaneously Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in 1xEV DO tests and measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings SOB ANd C M ieee 40 e Scrambling via PN Offsets and Long Codes eese 41 e Synchronization MS application GEN geeiert EE eee eerie 42 e Channel Detection and Channel Tvpes ees ee AR ee AA RR m 43 OQUDIVDES rinde EE 47 e Nul Camer Mode iis tarot kei eee died abe deed eee gee id 48 e Code Mapping and Branches ccccceccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceeceeeeeeseeseseeeneneeeeeeees 48 e Gods Display and Sort Order iac dedere dad atender SE Se ated ee a Ed 49 e Test Setup for 1xEV DO Base Station or Mobile Station Tests 50 e CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode AA 52 4 1 Slots and Sets The cdma2000 High Rate Packet Data standard was defined for packet oriented data transmission The user data is transmitted in individual data packages each of which may have different transmission settings such as the power level The data in one such package is called a slot In the 1xEV DO standard a slot is a basic time unit of 1 666 ms duration and corresponds to the expression power control group PCG in cdma2000 Each slot con
172. ble microbutton on the probe head By pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe Select the action that you want to start from the probe Run single Starts one data acquisition No action Prevents unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the microbut ton Remote command SENSe PROBe p SETup MODE on page 174 6 2 4 2 Output Settings The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 73 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration Code Domain Analysis o How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Output settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dialog box Output Digital IQ IF Video Output IF Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 elio no PE LT 74 Hrs ELE 74 DER A AE EP 75 MN EED EE RE OE AE EK EE ED 75 Mt 1t AA EE N Oe Ie 75 ME tree eegener 75 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 176 Trigger 2 3
173. bled Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS CDP NORM ON Activates the elimination of the VO offset Manual operation See Compensate IQ Offset on page 113 SENSe CDPower OPERation lt Mode gt The operation mode is used for the channel search Parameters lt Mode gt ACCess TRAFfic ACCess Only PICH always available and DATA channels can exist TRAFfic All channels PICH RRI DATA ACK and DRC can exist PICH and RRI are always in the signal RST TRAFfic For further details refer to Operating Modes Access and Traf fic on page 45 DP ORD HAD ets Hadamard order RAC TRACE2 eads out the results in Hadamard order DP ORD BITR ets BitReverse order RAC TRACE2 Reads out the results in BitReverse order Example na DH Hd OO Manual operation See Operation Mode on page 115 SENSe CDPower ORDer lt SortOrder gt This command sets the channel sorting for the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power result displays Parameters lt SortOrder gt HADamard BITReverse RST HADamard For further details refer to chapter 4 8 Code Display and Sort Order on page 49 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 206 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Configuring Code Domain Analysis DP ORD HAD ets Hadamard order RAC TRACE2 eads out the results in Hadamard order DP ORD BITR ets BitReverse order RAC TRACE2 Reads out the results
174. bration signal are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands exclusive to Analog Baseband data input and output INPutIO BAEanced E STAT ENE ee Mee a EEN 171 sed 38 2 Oo N er 172 INPUTIQ TR E 172 elle a d ES EE Es EE oe EG EG ee ea N EE 172 GENOT oe ee ee ie Ee ee ee E una be Ga ee a ee Re ER ek 173 INPut IQ BALanced STATe State This command defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Ana log Baseband connectors or as a plain UO signal via 2 simple ended lines Parameters State ON Differential OFF Simple ended RST ON Example INP IQ BAL OFF Manual operation See Input configuration on page 72 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 171 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements REENEN Configuring Code Domain Analysis INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO State This command defines whether the fullscale level i e the maximum input power on the Baseband Input connector is defined automatically according to the reference level or manually Parameters State ON Automatic definition OFF Manual definition according to INPut 10 FULLscale LEVel on page 172 RST ON Example INP IQ FULL AUTO OFF Manual operation See Fullscale Level Mode Value on page 84 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel lt PeakVoltage gt This command defines the peak voltage at the Baseband Input connector if the fullscale level is set to manual mode see 1NPut 10 FULL
175. cccccseceeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeees 82 Evaluation method esse ee ke ke 21 Teler EE 68 Trace results 235 Input SettiliS EE edet Sie EE ehe 70 Branches EE EN 48 Analog Baseband B71 Analysis E 43 Fullscale level sessie iese de P ei teet nae 84 Evaluation range ds e 209 VQ MOTE EE EE EO ete ede 71 e OR ON eee TRAGE ERU 235 Input type remote control ee eres 172 Selecting SE RR Ee es 209 Analog Baseband Interface B71 BTS Base transceiver station sssuss 11 Amplitude settings essere 82 Burst FEE iuc erede as 107 Input settings x se EE ENS DER Se deh tpa 70 Power vs Time remote ee ee ee 212 Analysis BTS Code Domain Settings 112 113 C Remote commands a EK En EER RE RE SS ER Re hee 247 Capture Length sssini ianei 92 193 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 279 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Index Capture offset MSRA applications esses 90 92 Remote Softkey Carrier Frequency Error essen 16 CCDF 1xEV DO results rtr ttr enne 36 Configuring SEN DO 111 CDA Analysis settings BTS ssssse 112 113 elle dle AE OE EE OE ER Configuring remote at Evaluation settings BTS remote 205 Patatmelters N c EE aariin 16 Performing aC EE EES CDE Peak se
176. channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abor tion has been completed Usage SCPI confirmed INITiate CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using INIT CONT OFF or finished in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INITiate IMMediate this command does not reset traces in max hold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measurements using maxhold or averaging functions Example for Spectrum application INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps INIT CONM WAI Continues the measurement next 20 sweeps and waits for the end Result Averaging is performed over 40 sweeps EEUU RU EE E SSS See User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 224 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements EEE eee ees Starting a Measurement Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 101 INITiate CONTinuous State This command controls the sweep mode Note that in single sweep mode you can synch
177. cially for code power measurements the results may vary considerably While a channel may be active on one branch the other branch may belong to an inactive channel For BTS signals the complex data i e both branches simultaneously may be analyzed as well Code Display and Sort Order In the result displays that refer to codes the currently selected code is highlighted in the diagram You select a code by entering a code number in the Evaluation Range settings By default codes are displayed in ascending order of the code number Hadamard order The currently selected code number is highlighted In 1xEV DO signals the codes that belong to the same channel need not lie next to each other in the code domain they may be distributed All codes that belong to the same channel are highlighted in light green In the 1xEV DO BTS signals each of the four channel types occurs at a specific time within each slot Thus instead of selecting a code you can also select which channel type is to be evaluated and displayed directly By default the Pilot channel as the first in the slot is evaluated In 1xXEV DO MS signals the sort order of the codes can be changed so that codes that belong to the same channel are displayed next to each other Bit Reverse sorting _ _ __L_____ N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 49 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics 4 9 Test Setup for 1xEV DO Base Station or Mobile Station Tests Example
178. cr geed degen 117 Preamplifier GT ue c RR 82 Ge 82 Predefined channel tables BTS application tona re Pep t BTS MOdE ses rero Ee se Ee ek N deas Channel detection Se MS application scsi occi retenti EE MS mode uites eae eio eben de bre eee Tee Provided re KEE ME Le WEE Presetting el ER N or eet IE 61 262 BR ETIESE N RI iis 59 ies EE 89 Probes lee olie EE OE ET Eni 73 le DE BR EA EE EE ER erdt 73 Protection RF input remote 1 rs EES ertet es 160 Q Q2 Modulation type iese RA Ke Re ee AR ke 47 Q4 Modulation type iese RA Ke Re ee AR ke 47 Q4Q2 Modulation type iese RA Ke Re ee AR kke 47 Quasi inactive codes ss sess 43 R R amp S DiglGonf errem eerte tret ener 70 R amp S EX IQ BOX bem AS ME EE EE 70 Range cea Ee ewes a Ee Ge ek AE ee 85 Reference level Auto level MERE ES AE Ee 80 84 102 Digital EE en 70 IEN 80 83 Offset SOftKey correr rere niaan 80 83 Softkey 80 83 Unit 80 83 Value 80 83 Reference Manual cccccccceeceeceeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeseneee 107 K84 remote command 212 Reference Mean Power e we 107 Power vs Time remote sees 211 Reference power 115 207 Refreshing MSRA applications remote ee ee 258 Remote commands Basics On SymMaX N OE RE bann 145 Boolean values
179. cy depends on the frequency span span gt 0 Spanmin 2 E fcenter E fmax ml SPAN min 2 fmax and span are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 177 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually set to a fixed value This setting is available for frequency and time domain measurements X Span Sets the step size for the center frequency to a defined factor of the span The X Factor defines the percentage of the span Values between 1 and 100 in steps of 1 are allowed The default setting is 10 Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 177 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 78 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration 6 2 5 2 Code Domain Analysis This parameter has no effect on the R amp S FSW hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It i
180. d TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 185 Hysteresis Trigger Source Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB This setting is available for frequency and time domain measurements only Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 186 Trigger Holdoff Trigger Source Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trig ger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 186 Slope Trigger Source For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 188 T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 89 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration mE E R OC EE E ERE NN Code Domain Analysis Capture Offset Trigger Source This setting is only available for applications in MSRA operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capt
181. d 241 Symbol Constellaliohi e e erano rrr hne reve binaire t ie e eere rax E n Ee De ae 242 Symbol EVM asses ese ese ee De de Ee Ge ARK Se AAA GUN ee GEEN RR Se SE GAAR se be EE ev 242 Bitstream The command returns the bitstream of one slot i e it returns one value for each bit in a symbol bit 1 gt bit 2 gt bit n gt The number of symbols per slot depends on the spreading factor while the number of returned bits per symbol depends on the modulation type see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 266 Accordingly the bitstream per slot is of different lengths If a channel is detected as being inactive the invalid bits in the bit stream are marked by the value 9 Channel Table Two different commands are available to retrieve the channel table results e TRAC DATA TRACEx commands return detailed trace information for each channel e TRAC DATA CTABle provides the maximum values of the timing phase offset between each assigned channel and the pilot channel Results for TRACEx Parameters The command returns 8 values for each channel in the following order channel type code class code number lt modulation gt lt mapping gt absolute level relative level timing offset phase offset For details on the individual parameters see table 3 3 In the BTS application the channels are sorted according to these rules 1 All detected special channels 2
182. ded by the connected device e g a generator If Auto is selected the sample rate is adjusted automatically by the connected device The allowed range is from 100 Hz to 10 GHz Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 167 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO on page 167 Full Scale Level The Full Scale Level defines the level and unit that should correspond to an VO sample with the magnitude 1 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 69 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration EENEG Code Domain Analysis If Auto is selected the level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 166 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 166 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO on page 165 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 166 Connected Instrument Displays the status of the Digital Baseband Interface connection If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed e Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face e Used port e Sample rate of the data currently being transferred via the Digital Baseband Interface Level and unit that corresponds to an VO sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level if provided by connected instrument Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice o
183. ditionally a complex long code is used for scrambling making the data less susceptible to interfer ence The long code used by a mobile station is defined by a mask on either branch These masks are required by the 1xEV DO MS application to distinguish the senders and are defined in the signal description During long code scrambling the channel data is mapped either to the or to the Q branch of the complex input signal Synchronization MS application only The 1xEV DO MS application has two synchronization stages the frame synchronization detection of the first chip of the frame and the rough frequency phase synchronization For the frame synchronization different methods are implemented Two methods use the known sequence of a pilot channel Pilot or Auxiliary Pilot a third does not require a pilot channel The frequency phase synchronization always requires a pilot channel Pilot or Auxiliary Pilot Synchronization is usually only successful if both frame and frequency phase synchronization were performed correctly Auto synchronization Using auto synchronization mode the following modes are tried sequentially until syn chronization was successful If none of the methods was successful a failed synchroni zation is reported If the result of the correlation methods sync on Pilot and Auxiliary Pilot becomes increasingly worse due to bad power conditions the non data aided synchronization works optimally and synchronizatio
184. dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing window lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result LEE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 215 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Example Usage Manual operation Configuring the Result Display LAY ADD 1 LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Query only See Bitstream on page 21 See BTS Channel Results on page 21 See Channel Table on page 22 See Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power on page 22 See Composite Constellation on page 24 See Composite Data Bitstream MS application only on page 24 See Composite Data Constellation MS application only on page 25 See Composite EVM on page 25 See General Results BTS application only on page 26 See Peak Code Domain Error on page 27 See Power vs Chip BTS application only on page 27 See Power vs Halfslot MS application only
185. ds are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measurement channel Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 154 UE fetis ae kl le RE 215 LAYout CATalog WINBow 9 Es AE SEE ESE rentre nete RAN EE Se era ere dea dee tere vea Siete 217 PAY Outs DE Rit WINDOW ace rn 217 LAveutb kEMeuetbWihNtewt OE EE ENNEN 218 LAY out REPLEsceb WINDOW TE 218 Berei EE 218 LAYOUtWINDOW A gt ADDF 1 Ee Se ce sand ee ek ee Ge As EN GE ke drea Ne Roda dd ca GE Ge Pee ee bed ee ee YU de 220 LAY out WINDOW A gt IDENT es onse ss ee EE RO oe GER a RO Ee GEGEE DS ER EES de ae bc ee Ee Be eu ee 220 LAYOUEWINBDOWERSBEMOVE es is Rs iN ee Ds EE eng ek ee ar we Ke Se ei Ge eg Te E 220 LAY cut ee E EEN 221 LAYout ADD WINDow WindowName Direction WindowType This command adds a window to the display This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win
186. e Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Selected State Stimulus Code Domain Settings On sij bg on Er Marker All Marker Off Ieremias 1 Code Domain Power Select Makoi os sit EE inane etd Cox unde Rv p e NG 122 Selected Markef ee dei ren rrr e ti Rede rr ea deer EE a For eve du ad dev eaa e a 123 Oe EE 123 P SIC EE EE OE UEM 123 IET C Mus ET 123 All Markers OM ice toic erit Te ceu reca En Doer pecca cu ee ve ea eu Deve e He E deve sa c Eu ew dnas 124 Select Marker Opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate one or more markers quickly User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 122 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Analysis Markers Selected State Selected State Selected State memes Con M ves B on Eg Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 249 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 250 X value Defines the position of the marker on the x axis channel slot symbol depending on evaluation Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 250 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 249 Marker Type Toggles the mar
187. e ee ke ee ee Re ee 229 Status ER EE EE EE RE OE Eai 14 Channels ascii a a 98 100 Registers BE ER EE OE OE Og 258 Status registers STAT QUES POW uses see ens ees diia 160 STATus QUEStionable DIQ ooo eects 168 Subtypes Remote aene m possint EE 158 Iris OE OE OE 62 64 Suffixes COMMON RE EE RE EG 150 Sweep Neel lo RE AE N ER M 101 Configuration softkey iese see ee Re ee ee 100 Configuring remote ee sse 201 er Symbol Constellation s Evaluation method ee Ak ee Trat resulis nihi teer Symbol EVM Evaluation method ee ee Ak ee Tiraceresults 2 radere rentes Symbol rate BUS application SE AN RE GER GER oett ses jy Symbols Number per slot iiipin 266 per liall slot RE EE EE Ee 267 Power SyNnEhronIizatiONn 22 itr ee Ee GEGEE EE egg be nie Wie EE EE E Auxiliary pilot Channel Power iis se ss Ee RE de dk EN Er be sede re Reference frequencies bou cce T RES Connections Equipment ss Presetlings sr Threshold Active channels R I le Ber E Calculating EE Results remote Pe EE Te sated c Title bar WING OW EE EN aai aE 14 Traces Configuration softkey sese Configuring remote e Exporting NC e bor Mode remote Results remote Traffic Operatiomnmod uerit ttr
188. e Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the trace data from the CDA meas urements Note that for these measurements only 1 trace per window can be configured FORMat DATA lt Format gt This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FSW to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format Parameters lt Format gt ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other formats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format In the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data For I Q data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed TRACe lt n gt DATA lt ResultType gt This command reads trace data from the R amp S FSW User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 233 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements i H P H ege Retrieving Results For details on reading trace data for other than code domain measurements refer to the TRACe DATA command
189. e and bits per symbol Channel type Code Sub SF Symbol Modulation type Chips per slot Sym Bits per slot and code class type rate bols per Mapping or Mapping slot Q complex and code QPSK 8 16 64 PSK QAM QAM 3 16 64 QAM 1600 0 1600 100 200 300 400 500 1600 64 1536 96 192 288 384 480 1600 128 1472 92 184 276 368 460 1600 256 1344 84 168 252 336 420 1600 512 1088 68 136 204 272 340 1600 1024 576 36 72 104 144 180 MS signals Table 1 9 Relationship between various channel parameters in the 1xEV DO MS application Data rate ksps Spreading factor Code class Symbols per half slot 76 8 16 4 64 153 6 8 3 128 307 2 4 2 256 Modulation type Bits per symbol BPSK 1 2BPSK 2 QPSK 2 8 PSK 3 16QAM 4 Q2 4 Q4 2 Q4Q2 6 E4E2 9 Reference Supported Bandclasses The bandclass defines the frequency band used for ACLR and SEM measurements It also determines the corresponding limits and ACLR channel settings according to the User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 267 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Annex REESEN Reference VO Data File Format iq tar 1xEV DO standard The used bandclass is defined in the SEM or ACLR measurement settings see Bandclass on page 109 Table 1 11 Supported bandclasses for 1xEV DO RF measurements Bandclass SCPI para Description 0 0 800 MHz Cellular Band 1 1 1 9 GHz PCS Band 2 2 TACS Band 3
190. e channel on the analyzed branch the channel is not occupied but an active channel exists on the other branch The Hadamard or BitReverse order is important for sorting the channels but not for the number of values With Hadamard the individual codes are output in ascending order With BitReverse codes which belong to a particular channel are adjacent to each other Since an error power is output for Code Domain Error Power consolidation of the power values is not appropriate The number of codes that are output therefore generally cor responds to the base spreading factor Code Domain Power BTS application The command returns three values for each code in a channel lt code number gt lt power level gt lt power ID gt The number of results corresponds to the spreading factor see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 266 In addition the output depends on the mapping settings The output is either the branch the Q branch or the complex signal Value Description lt code number gt code number within the channel lt power level gt depending on SENSe CDPower PDISplay absolute level in dBm of the code channel at the selected channel slot or relative level in dB of the channel referenced to total power in the channel type lt power ID gt type of power detection 0 inactive channel 1 active channel In Hadamard order the different codes are outp
191. e conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 Usage SCPI confirmed STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVEN register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the
192. e ne 13 dT RE e rrr eng Threshold IE RE EE OE EA EE N Channel tables dle EER RE EE Adding channels A oo MR EE RE NG Channel number Channel status EE OE EE Channel typo indt herren rete EE se NE Comment COMPANISOM ME ele nl EE Configuring remote COPYING e Creating anes EE EE i eere Creating from measurement Deleting RE EE ee teretes Deleting channels A Details BTS Details MS Died EER M DO16QAM ve et BDomiairi contlict RE EE EE EG DOOPSK e eli EE Evaluation method ese ee ee ke ee Managing e Managing remote sss Results remote Selected RE RE N Selecting RR EE OR EA AE Settings SC ee le Traceresults irn nter Channel types ACK ey IC Configuring in table e DATA EE Detected MS EE DRC T Evaluation RE EE EE EE Retrieving E IE EE RE AE c Special MS iss de RE rd se eb certo oat Chip Rate Error n 2 Results remote csetera Chips os 266 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 280 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Index Code eL P 18 BTS appliCaHOR is otii rere 266 MS application Code Display Order eek ee RR RR AA ede 114 206 Code domlain 4 enne GE Re teer roh NE ee EE ie 266 Code Domain Analysis SEG CDA ER 15 Code Domain Error Power TOE er N EE 22 Code Domain Power TAAR RE EE 22 Code domain settings lei AR
193. e same as in the base unit and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes 2 1 Starting the 1xEV DO Applications The 1xEV DO measurements require special applications on the R amp S FSW User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 11 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Welcome to the 1xEV DO Applications a i ee Understanding the Display Information To activate the 1xEV DO applications 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel of the R amp S FSW A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the 1xEV DO BTS or 1xEV DO MS item DO DOI LA D 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the 1xEV DO application The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the 1xEV DO Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Over view softkey from any menu see chapter 6 2 2 Configuration Overview on page 59 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be acti
194. e signal description provides information on the expected input signal e BIS Signal Descriptio iere tildes 156 e MS Signal Descriptio oai N 159 BTS Signal Description The following commands describe the input signal in BTS measurements For more information see chapter 4 6 Multi Carrier Mode on page 48 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency sees 156 CONFigure CDPower BTSIMCARrierFILTerROFF ee ee see ese se see ee ee ee ee ee ee de ee Ee Ee ee 156 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer S TATe esee 157 CONFigure CDPower B TS MCARrer FIL Per TYPE nacre tuta cot emu Eg etos 157 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGO eeeeeieee ee ee tanen ennt nna ke ee 158 CONFloure CDbPowerf BTGlMCAbRrert SGTATel nennen 158 GONFigure GDPower BTS SUBType m teniente kb Rao tun eh hu ER de EN 158 SENSe CDPawerPNOFISBL tede E Eon REED px as PEE Md Ee NE EE N ee E GEES SG GE ee 159 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency Frequency This command sets the cut off frequency for the RRC filter Parameters Frequency Range 0 1 MHz to 2 4 MHz RST 1 25 Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter CONF CDP MCAR FILT COFR 1 5MHZ Sets the cut off frequency to 1 5 MHz
195. e the settings for the selected window Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal BTS Signal RT ee e EE 61 MS Signal BE ele es T aad 64 BTS Signal Description These settings describe the input signal in BTS measurements EEUU RU RA I EE N EE SSSR User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 61 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Configuration Code Domain Analysis HzsschanneleQu2 Code P wig Si E el Tune p dg hann ei Common Subtype PN Offset o for external Trigger only Multi Carrier Multi Carrier Enhanced Algorithm Multi Carrier Filter Filter Type Roll Off Factor Cut Off Frequency msc E e 62 Bero c 62 MEE M 63 L Enhanced Algorithm se ee ee ee sess ee SR tenete ek ta tete tata ta ee Se aa ek Se ee ek dada 63 L Muli Camer Fer MNT MT 63 R Mem 63 Ka jl o4 RH 63 L Cut Off Ereouencn ariii nidia aaraa EEEa 63 Subtype Specifies the characteristics of the used transmission standard For details see chapter 4 5 Subtypes on page 47 0 1 Single carrier 2 Increased number of active users En Modulation type 64QAM can be detected Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS SUBType on page 158 PN Offset Specifies the Pseudo Noise PN offset from an external trigger
196. easurements the unit should not be changed as this would lead to useless results Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the fullscale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal com pression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 103 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 205 Fullscale Level Mode Value The fullscale level defines the maximum power you can input at the Baseband Input connector without clipping the signal The fullscale level can be defined automatically according to the reference level or man ually For manual input the following values can be selected e 025V e 05V e 1V e 2V If probes are connected the possible fullscale values are adapted according to the pro be s attenuation and maximum allowed power For details on probes see the R amp S FSW VO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO on page 172 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel on page 172 EEUU EE EE N AE EE SS
197. eband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input Return values lt PartNumber gt Part number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 1 213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input I Return values lt SerialNo gt Serial number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE lt Mode gt Select the action that is started with the micro button on the probe head See also Microbutton Action on page 73 RETE RU RA I E e EE A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLTLLXLL EXI User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 174 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Suffix lt p gt Parameters lt Mode gt Manual operation Configuring Code Domain Analysis 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connector setting Baseband Input RSINgle Run single starts one data acquisition NOACtion Nothing is started on pressing the micro button RST RSINgle See Microbutton Action on page 73 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup NAME Queries the name of the probe Suffix lt p gt Return values lt Name gt Usage
198. eband input For real type baseband input or Q only the center frequency is always 0 Hz Note If the analysis bandwidth to either side of the defined center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequency 40 MHz 80 MHz an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency or the analysis bandwidth Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 177 EEUU EE a User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 72 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration Code Domain Analysis Probe Settings Probes are configured in a separate tab on the Input dialog box which is displayed when you select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then Input Source Config Input Source Power Sensor Probes Probe I Name RT ZS30 Serial Number 1410 4309 02 Part Number 101241 Type Single Ended Not Present mon Setting Microbutton Action un single 3 Run Single For each possible probe connector Baseband Input Baseband Input Q the detected type of probe if any is displayed The following information is provided for each con nected probe e Probe name e Serial number e R amp S part number e Type of probe Differential Single Ended For more information on using probes with an R amp S FSW see the R amp S FSW User Manual For general information on the R amp S9RTO probes see the device manuals eeler ele Parere TE 73 Microbutton Action Active R amp S probes except for RT ZS10E have a configura
199. ed slots are not processed by the 1xEV DO application all at once but rather in sets one at a time One set usually consists of 32 slots in BTS application and 64 slots in the MS application You can select how many sets are to be captured and which set is currently analyzed and displayed The possible capture range is from 1 to a maximum of 1500 BTS application or 810 MS application sets 4 2 Scrambling via PN Offsets and Long Codes Short code scrambling Base stations use a pseudo noise PN sequence also referred to as short code sequence to scramble the data during transmission The used PN sequence is circulated in fixed time intervals A specified PN offset value determines the start phase for the short code sequence The PN parameter is unique for each base station Thus the signals from different base stations can be distinguished quickly by the 1xEV DO BTS application if the PN Off R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics 4 3 Synchronization MS application only set is defined in the signal description and an external trigger is used to provide a ref erence for the start phase If no offset is specified or no external trigger is available calculation is much slower as the correct PN must be determined from all possible posi tions During short code scrambling the channel data is split up into and Q components Long code scrambling Mobile stations also use a PN short code but with a fixed or no offset Ad
200. edefined channel table 263 264 DO8PSK Predefined channel table 263 264 Domain conflict Channel table tirenn issnin ecrit 98 DOQPSK Predefined channel table sssssss 263 DRC Channel type eN snid eee res 44 Drop out time dee ER eene 89 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 151 E E4E2 Modulation type irren eres eme 47 Electronic input attenuation esseesesesss 81 Eliminating ego eI 113 115 206 Enhanced algorithm Multi carrier signals sesse 63 65 158 Etro messages eer ere ter tert EE ege 128 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 281 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Index Errors Device connections Bi 168 le BR EE EE 80 83 Error vector magnitude See EVM RE EE RE 25 Evaluation methods REMOTE ER a EE 215 Evaluation range Branch PEE 117 119 209 ei o tire toten te 116 118 Remote commands ee ke 208 Sets 92 117 119 210 TE le EE 112 lnc RE 116 119 Ge LEE 116 118 Evaluations GDA 20 EE see also Result Displays Selecting EE EE EE EE hia 15 EVM Composite ss a nodi SE EE EER se Sag bee Ee AE Ee ER 25 Results remote seek kke ee ee 229 VS SYMDOll E 18 30 Exporting lee 55 VO data VO data remote see ee ee ee ee 255 oi
201. ee ee ee ee ee Gee ee ee ee eke ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 175 SENSe PROBE lt p gt SETUP STATE iira rira ainiai eridan siaki r Eria rinia 175 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SE Tup TYPE Es EE Ee Mees Eng EDE EE ahaa aa kaeti ee see seer sees bek erge EDE gee eg ig edge 176 js THU e EE EE EE EE N EE EE ates 173 SENSe SWEep COUN A 202 LEE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 278 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Index Index Symbols RE remote 1 ES ESE ES ER ER eege rennen 247 RF measuremehis iseer rettet tenen renun 112 1xEV DO Selttiigs ase Aetna teers pi net ecu 112 uge ie EE tete tee et 11 Analysis interval Measurements eie iese ees ee ee ee Ee ee ee ee ee 15 MSRA d iis se ees N ver eredi he a t Ge p d 91 92 192 Remote commands ee ee 145 Analysis DE EE RE DE uev eed 53 RF measurements eerie mete 31 Applications 1xEV DO application Adopted parameters ees ee see ee Re ee ee ee 58 EE RE Ee PD ee ee 40 Site oj ure eT 58 1xEV DO mode Attenuation zi si 81 Error messages sissors see Ge EE Re Ke nnne nennen 128 Ve OE EE EE ER EE eas 81 Optimizing iese Re esee 128 Configuring remote sss 182 Troubleshootingi rit rrr 128 Electronic wl 5CHANS External eko 52 Predefined channel table 263 265 Manual E 81 64 QAM Option B25 Sc 4 81 Modulation type ee Ge ee ke ee 47 Protective remote s snien niaaa 160 A
202. elType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 151 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Activating the Measurement Channel lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see table 11 1 Example INST CRE REPL Spectrum2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named Spectrum2 by a new measurement channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activated Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL Spectrum4 Deletes the spectrum channel with the name Spectrum4 INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to re
203. em configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation e Using the common status registers After a short introduction to remote commands the tasks specific to 1xEV DO applica tions are described here EM nuo o RR ER iaa 145 IES uUBURIUDC ETE 150 e Activating the Measurement Channel is GEREG GRA Ee nete Ge Se ek Gee 150 e Selecting a Mezsurement EE 154 e Configuring Code Domain Angels 155 Contiguring IRF Measurements EE 210 e Configuring the Result Display eene Re EER RS AGE RR Re Rae De AGE Re ennt ee Ge ese 214 e Starting a Measurement i ee RE Ee Ge Re RR Re RE ee ERG ee Es ee ie 223 e Se ME OR EE AE EE AE EE EE 228 g ERGE EE EE ences 247 e Importing and Exporting VO Data and Resuhts esse see ee ee se ee ee AA ee ee 255 e Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only 256 e Querying the Status Registers emeret erkennt 258 e Commands ege 261 11 1 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instrument or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request infor mation query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the commands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a comma
204. ement changing some parameters one after the other should demonstrate the resulting effects values adapted to the measurement signal are changed to non adapted values Test setup 1 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSW 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET 2 FREQ 878 49 MHz 3 LEVEL 0 dBm 4 DIGITAL STD 1xEV DO 5 DIGITAL STD gt Set Default I User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 136 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples i a a es eee i Meas 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error 6 DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD 7 DIGITAL STD gt 1xEV DO gt STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 PRESET 2 MODE gt 1xEV DO BTS 3 AMPT gt Reference level 10 dBm 4 FREQ gt Center frequency 878 49 MHz The following results are displayed the first window shows the power of the code domain of the signal The x axis represents the individual codes while the y axis shows the power of each code In the second window the General Result Summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the code domain power measurement including the frequency error MultiView 33 Spectru 1xEV DO BTS 3 Reference Level RefLevel 10 00 dBm Freq 8 4
205. ence level You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 103 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 205 RF Attenuation Defines the attenuation applied to the RF input This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Attenuation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting By default and when Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 is not available mechanical attenuation is applied This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB also using the rotary knob Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is speci fied in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut
206. ent eee User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 203 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements REESEN Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters Mode AUTO The R amp S FSW determines the measurement length automatically according to the current input data MANual The R amp S FSW uses the measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 203 RST AUTO Manual operation See Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto on page 103 See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 103 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVe1 on page 205 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range O dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 103 SENSe ADJust CONF igure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold When the
207. enter frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 78 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO State This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK lt CouplingType gt This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt CouplingType gt SPAN Couples the step size to the span Available for measurements in the frequency domain RBW Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth Available for measurements in the time domain OFF Decouples the step size RST SPAN Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor lt Factor gt This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt Factor gt 1 to 100 PCT RST 10 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 178 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements EMG EMO J H e ingn 1 11 5 3 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT SE
208. er LCODe Q on page 160 Multi Carrier Activates or deactivates the multi carrier mode This mode improves the processing of multi carrier signals It allows you to measure one carrier out of a multi carrier signal Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe on page 158 Enhanced Algorithm Multi Carrier Activates or deactivates the enhanced algorithm that is used for signal detection on multi carrier signals This algorithm slightly increases the calculation time This setting is only available if Enhanced Algorithm on page 63 is activated Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo on page 158 Multi Carrier Filter Multi Carrier Activates or deactivates the usage of a filter for signal detection on multi carrier signals This setting is only available if Enhanced Algorithm on page 63 is activated For details see chapter 4 6 Multi Carrier Mode on page 48 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe on page 157 Filter Type Multi Carrier Selects the filter type if Filter Type is activated Two filter types are available for selection a low pass filter and an RRC filter By default the low pass filter is active The low pass filter affects the quality of the mea sured signal compared to a measurement without a filter The RRC filter comes with an integrated Hamming window If selected two more settings become available for configuration the Roll Off Factor
209. er 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 16 7 6 Traces The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen ace Traces M E UEL Code Domain Power In CDA evaluations only one trace can be active in each diagram at any time Window specific configuration The settings in this dialog box are specific to the selected window To configure the set tings for a different window select the window outside the displayed dialog box or select the window from the Specifics for selection list in the dialog box User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 120 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Analysis Markers Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting The Detector is automatically set to Auto Peak Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The Detector is automatically set to Positive Peak Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one The Detector is automatically set to Negative Peak Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Average Count determines the number
210. er Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional software option The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument functions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote con trol commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the software func tions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are described here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on maintenance instru ment interfaces and troubleshooting In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the application are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parameters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not included in the application manuals All user manuals are also available for download from the R amp S website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html I User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 8 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Preface 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the CD delivered with
211. escribed in the following sections For details on the graphical results of these evaluation methods see chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 20 OM is RE OO LOO DLL RR EA OO IE 235 e Channel Table EE ER GESKREE EE se EE se EEN e ER npa ie N aa eet 235 e Code Domain Error Power BTS application eee 237 e Code Domain Error Power MS application recentes 237 e Code Domain Power BTS application 238 e Code Domain Power MS application iss road ocio renati SEG GE eo racc tune 239 e Composite Constellation oer n n ren a te ee eee ether et ee eren 239 e Composite Data Bitstream MS application 239 e Composite Data Constellation MS applicaton 240 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 234 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements DESEN 11 9 3 1 11 9 3 2 Retrieving Results e Composite Data EVM MS appltcaton ennn nnnnnnnnneeennnnnnnnnseneneees 240 e Composite EVM RMS ss nie tear eB aia anette 240 e Peak Code Domain EO coiere ees the eene EE HE e eine Teo npa ee TEE FUR Ne YE aad 240 e Powervs Chip BIS applicatior oir neon hn ee nnn 240 e Power vs Half Slot MS application iieri nidis 241 ge Power ES T EE RE EE 241 e Power vs Time BTS application 241 e Result Summary Channel Results General Results BTS application 241 e Result Summary MO application eiiiai Eed EE sees ce eate dee padde
212. ets each Set has 32 Slots x Set to Analyze Fig 6 1 Signal capture settings in BTS application MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the 1xEV DO application in MSRA mode define the application data see chapter 6 2 8 Application Data MSRA on page 92 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 91 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration 6 2 8 Code Domain Analysis S3mple S8lg cce AA EE OR ales een etn nter age keel cde EE ER 92 ai al ES ER EG EG De Re ED ea ee Ee 92 Eelere ee vates ve ee ee De E PUn Prendre s Ge QI UN ex SR WEE ee LER ee ed he N 92 Numberof EE 92 ae PMMA ri EE 92 Sample Rate The sample rate is always 5 33333 MHz indicated for reference only Invert Q Inverts the sign of the signal s Q branch The default setting is OFF Remote command SENSe CDPower QINVert on page 193 Number of Slots Sets the number of slots you want to analyze The maximum number of slots is 36 for the BTS application and 70 in the MS application The default value is 3 To capture more slots increase the Number of Sets on page 92 to capture In this case the number of slots is number of sets x 32 BTS application or number of sets x 64 MS application For more information on slots and sets see chapter 4 1
213. eviewData Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part ofthe id tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration It is recommended that you add user data as XML content Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the VO data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an ig tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as in t16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFactor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt lt Channel gt PowerVs Min l ime lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt f lt f lt f Loat gt 95 lt float gt Loat gt 94 lt float gt Loat gt 93 lt float gt ArrayOfFloat User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 271 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Annex Reference VO D
214. ey on the front panel b In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement The selected measurement is activated with the default settings for 1xEV DO imme diately T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 130 R amp S FSW 84 K85 How to Perform Measurements in 1xEV DO Applications If necessary adapt the settings as described for the individual measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual Select the Display Config button and select the evaluation methods that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analysis functions in the result displays e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps if necessary increase the Sweep Count in the Sweep settings e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the evaluated signal e Use special marker functions to calculate noise or a peak list e Configure a limit check to detect excessive deviations Optionally export the trace data of the graphical evaluation results to a file a In the Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box switch to the Trace Export tab b Select Export Trace to ASCII File c Define a file name and storage location and select OK To select the application data for MSRA me
215. ference signal in percent For further details refer to Composite EVM on page 25 Data Mode Type DMTYpe BTS application only Modulation type in the DATA channel type 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16 QAM 10 64 QAM IQ Imbalance IQIMbalance IQ imbalance of the signal in 96 IQ Offset IQOFfset IQ offset of the signal in 96 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 17 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays EGO OC U n Code Domain Analysis Parameter SCPI Parame Description ter Max Inactive Power IPMMax Maximum power level in inactive MAC channels relative to the abso MAC lute power of the MAC channel in dB This is the highest value from the l and Q branch of the inactive MAC channels Max Power Data PDMax Maximum power level in Data channel This is the highest value of the and Q branch of the Data channel Min Power Data PDMin Minimum power level in Data channel This is the lowest value of the and Q branch of the Data channel Peak CDE PCDerror Peak code domain error in dB Power Data PDATa Power in the Data channel in dBm Power MAC PMAC Power in the MAC channel in dBm Power Pilot PPILot Power of the pilot channel in dBm PPICh BTS application power of the PICH channel Power Preamble PPReamble Power in the PREAMBLE channel in dBm Preamable Length PLENgth Length of pre
216. fined channel type or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified name See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 151 For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 Parameters lt ChannelType gt BDO 1xEV DO BTS option R amp S FSW K84 MDO 1xEV DO MS option R amp S FSW K85 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 61 Selecting a Measurement The following commands are required to define the measurement type in a remote envi ronment For details on available measurements see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 15 CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASUremerit aesti terere GEREGEER Rak aa Ua re ca be 154 CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement Measurement This command selects the RF measurement type with predefined settings according to the 1xEV DO standard LEE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 154 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 5 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters lt Measurement gt ACLR CCDF CDPower ESPectrum OBWidth POWer ACLR Adjacent Channel Power measurement
217. g R amp S SMU R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 10 Digital VO Output Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred while the connection between analyzer and digital VO data signal source e g R amp S SMU R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 11 14 not used 15 This bit is always set to 0 STATUus OUESuUoRable DIOC ONDIUDES EE 169 STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle enceinte ee ee nnn nsns ee ee sauna 170 STATus QUESttonable DIG NTRane ON acida aaa iaa denn ap Ee 170 STATUus OUEStonable DIOTP TRANSOM iuc Ge es cana a na De de EE Tea aede nada Ee 170 STATus QUEStonable DIGPEVENI ioi rettet ek three RARR GE ten eae 170 STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Example STAT QUES DIO COND Usage Query only T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 169 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements REESEN Configuring Code Domain Analysis STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle lt BitDefinition gt ChannelName This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows tru
218. ge SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Settings on page 82 See Preamplifier option B24 on page 82 INPut GAIN VALue lt Gain gt This command selects the preamplification level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 181 The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 EE EE EE m User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 181 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements DESEN 11 5 3 3 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters Gain 15 dB 30 dB The availability of preamplification levels depends on the R amp S FSW model e R amp S FSW8 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Settings on page 82 See Preamplifier option B24 on page 82 Configuring the Attenuation NEE GE IE uu 182 INPutATTenuationsAUTE ase Es GESE SE EE SEENEN EN de GEK EE GE Ge 183 ME EAT nm 183 INPUCEATT AUTO E 183 INPUtESTT SLANG ES ED a a Ee a tanta rad Ee aa E Re se quio 184 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If an electronic attenuator is available and active the command defines a mechanical attenuation see INPut EATT STATe on page 184 If you set the attenuation manually it is no
219. ge 162 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are sup pressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 161 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW ensures that image frequencies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz Therefore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 162 Input Connector Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF INPUT connector default or the optional BASEBAND INPUT I connector This setting is only available if the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input For more
220. ge 255 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement a a P nmm Error Messages 8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results do not meet your expectations try the following methods to optimize the measurement Synchronization fails e Check the center frequency e Perform an automatic reference level adjustment e In BTS mode When using an external trigger check whether an external trigger signal is being sent to the R amp S FSW and check the PN offset e n MS mode check the Long Code Mask and Long Code Offset e Make sure Invert Q is off 8 1 Error Messages Error messages are entered in the error event queue of the status reporting system in the remote control mode and can be queried with the command SYSTem ERRor A short explanation of the application specific error messages for 1xEV DO measure ments is given below Status bar message Description Sync not found This message is displayed if synchronization is not possible Possible causes are that frequency level or signal description values are set incorrectly or the input signal is invalid Sync OK This message is displayed if synchronization is possible Preamble missing This message is displayed if the PREAMBLE channel type is examined and no preamble is found in the signal
221. ge 75 See Pulse Length on page 75 Signal Capturing The following commands configure how much and how data is captured from the input signal MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition commands for the 1xEV DO application in MSRA mode define the application data see chapter 11 12 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only on page 256 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Useful commands for configuring signal capture described elsewhere SENSe CDPower SET on page 210 Remote commands exclusive to signal capturing SENSe GDPowerlGQbenglh caccia erre utem recen eterne re a Ru evo ini antes 193 SENSE ICDOPOWERGINVe ER N ORR M 193 ISENS amp JCDPOWeESET OO DNI Irc ice SE Ge Ie aperire eere FRAN ee EN EA EG EO Reese nein 193 EE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 192 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements EMEN EEMEMCCCC s Mc t 11 5 6 Configuring Code Domain Analysis SENSe CDPower IQLength lt CaptureLength gt This command sets the capture length in multiples of slots In MS mode the number of half slots is defined Parameters lt CaptureLength gt Range 2 to 36 MS mode 70 RST 3 Manual ope
222. h the possible orientation in time and the gain The ACCESS mode initiates and controls the data transmission between the mobile sta tion and the base station In Access mode only the Reverse Pilot Channel PICH and the Reverse Data Channel DATA are used _L_L_____ a User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 45 Channel Detection and Channel Types Fig 4 2 1xEV DO MS channels in ACCESS mode Once the transmission has been established the TRAFFIC mode takes over The Traffic mode contains all 5 channels listed in table 4 1 The RRI takes up the first 256 chips ofthe first half slot and shares its code with the PICH The ACK is always just one half slot in length The DRC is a multiple of slots in length and offset by one half slot R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics Subtypes ACK ACKGain RRI Unity Gain DRC Data Fig 4 3 1xEV DO MS channels in TRAFFIC mode 4 5 Subtypes The 1xEV DO standard includes various subtypes of the protocol for the physical layer In subtype 2 the number of active users increases which has an affect on the used traffic channel MAC and the spreading factor number of orthogonal codes doubles for channel types MAC and PREAMBLE In subtype 2 the following modulation types are added within some of the MAC channels in the BTS application e ON OFF keying ACK on the branch OOKA I e ON OFF keying ACK on the Q branch OOKA Q e ON OFF keying NACK on the branch OOKN
223. h Rate Packet Data Air Interface Specification of version C S0024 v 3 0 dated December 2001 and the Recommended Minimum Performance Standards for cdma2000 High Rate Packet Data Access Network of version C S0032 0 v 1 0 dated December 2001 These standard documents are published as TIA 856 IS 856 and TIA 864 IS 864 respectively The application firmware supports code domain measurements on 1xEV DO signals This code domain power analyzer provides the following analyses among others Code Domain Power Channel Occupancy Table EVM Frequency Error and RHO Factor In the BTS application all four channel types PILOT MAC PREAMBLE and DATA are supported and the modulation types in the DATA channeltype are detected automatically The signals to be measured may contain different modulation types or preamble lengths in each slot thus making it possible to perform measurements on base stations while operation is in progress In the MS application all 5 channel types PICH RRI DATA ACK and DRC as well as TRAFFIC and ACCESS operating mode are supported Owing to their time structure the signals are analyzed on half slot basis In addition to the code domain measurements described in the 1xEV DO standard the 1xEV DO applications feature measurements in the spectral range such as channel power adjacent channel power occupied bandwidth and spectrum emission mask with predefined settings All functions not discussed in this manual are th
224. hannel Type 1 Code Dome ower I Branch 2 immary tesults Set 0 Slot Results Set 0 7 Slot 0 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area with marker information 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on measurement 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode additional tabs and elements are available A colored back ground of the screen behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA operating mode RF measurements are not available in MSRA operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Channel bar information In 1xEV DO applications the R amp S FSW shows the following settings Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in 1xEV DO applications Ref Level Reference level Freq Center frequency for the RF signal Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Channel Channel number code number and spreading factor Half Slot Half Slot number see chapter 4 1 Slots and Sets on page 40 Power Ref Reference used for power results Subtype Subtype of the used transmission standard In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though th
225. hannel table selected in the Predefined Tables list Auto Detects channels automatically using pilot sequences and fixed code numbers The automatic search provides an overview of the channels contained in the currently measured signal If channels are not detected as being active change the Inactive Channel Threshold or select the Prede fined channel search mode Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 197 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 94 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration REESEN Code Domain Analysis 6 2 10 2 Channel Table Management Channel tables are managed in the Channel Detection dialog box which is displayed when you select the Channel Detection button in the configuration Overview Lea 95 Selec hnge Table iode edere Ea deed n hse se Fr dea ER 95 Creating a New Table EE RE EE OR S 95 Ediinga table SE Pee ee e Ge ui GR ee es ee 0d 95 Copying a Table EE OE EE OE aa 96 Deling a EE 96 Restoring Default Tablas KERR men E Re d Ee EE EA 96 Predefined Tables The list shows all available channel tables and marks the currently used table with a checkmark The currently focussed table is highlighted blue For details on predefined channel tables provided by the 1xEV DO applications see chapter A 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 263 The following channel tables are available by default DO16QAM DO8PSK DO IDLE DOQPSK Channel tables for BTS application 5CHANS PICH
226. he Spectrum application For details refer to Measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual The measurement specific settings for the following measurements are available via the Overview Power Vs Time BTS ONIV iss ee eene tere NA ER Ee KERE Ee cenae Reg eed ee e ENEE 105 e Signal Channel Power MeasurementS i see ee ee dk ee ka ee 108 e Channel Power ACER Measurements 2 ER Ee RR ee EG EA Ee ek GE ee Ee 108 e Spectrum Emission MASK i ii eee Re EER NG Se ESE Recte ee ede hace 109 e Occupied Bandwidth ee AA AR ER EE EE ee RA EA RE ER Re ee ee ee eke Re Ee 110 UE cp RR EE AR EE ER EE OE HE 111 Power Vs Time BTS only The Power vs Time measurement performs a special Spectrum Emission Mask mea surement with predefined settings as defined by the 1xEV DO standard To do so it examines a specified number of half slots Up to 36 half slots can be captured and pro I User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 105 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration i RR S RF Measurements cessed simultaneously That means that for a standard measurement of 100 half slots only three data captures are necessary After capturing the data the application averages the measured values and compares the results to the emission envelope mask Table 6 2 Default settings used for the Power vs Time measurement Setting Default value Frequency Span 0 Zero Span Sweep Time 833 38 Ms RBW 3 MHz VBW 10 MHz De
227. he associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 260 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Commands for Compatibility Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVEN register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 11 14 Commands for Compatibility The following commands are provided for compatibility to other signal analyzers only For new remote control programs use the specified alternative commands CAL E E E 261 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime LIST STATe sse 262 SENS amp CDPower NR TT 262 SENS amp CDPowerPRENSet N ER ee 262 CALCulate n FEED Evaluation This command selects the evaluation method of the measured data that is to be displayed in the specified window Note tha
228. he indefinite format requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 11 2 Common Suffixes In 1xEV DO applications the following common suffixes are used in remote commands and not described for each command individually Suffix Value range Description n 1 16 Window lt t gt 1 CDA Trace 6 RF lt m gt 1 4 CDA Marker 1 16 RF lt ch gt 1 18 TX channel Channel in RF measurements 1 11 ALT channel lt k gt 1 8 Limit line Line in RF measurements 1 2 Display line 11 3 Activating the Measurement Channel 1xEV DO measurements require special applications on the R amp S FSW The measure ment is started immediately with the default settings User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 150 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements RENE a Ma Se Activating the Measurement Channel INS Trumen CRESE DUPLICA is ee NE Ge EKG tere kie oett ONS open EE Ge Re Ee RE NEG ER Ee 151 ERA EL Se EIS NE RO OR e RE HEN decane 151 EER ARE HASE ME EO OR EN N EE A 151 INS Trumen el 152 INS Trumen EIS FEE EE See EE EE ege 152 INS WRT NAIM os icai rer ea Ee ee EE EG GR SIG e 153 EER LESS EE EEN 154 SYSTem PRESet CHANNelEXECute iese sesse ee ee ee ede ee se se ee ee ee ee ee eek ee ee ee ee ee ek ee ge
229. higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 125 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value RETREAT RU EE EU SSS User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 254 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 11 Importing and Exporting VO Data and Results Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 125 See Search Next Minimum on page 126 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker position Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 125 Importing and Exporting VO Data and Results For details on importing and exporting VO data see chapter 5 UO Data Import and Export on page 55 MMEMGrLOADAG STATE ret tie ARE EMS Se Ee Ke RE MA dean io Dolore ina SEKER Ge S ER READ daca 255 MMEMBrIYSTORSIGGOMMENE 21 se KEES ee KEN eu EE teo EENS eA ERA EE Ee EE
230. ier FILTer STATe on page 157 Filter Type Multi Carrier Selects the filter type if Filter Type is activated Two filter types are available for selection a low pass filter and an RRC filter By default the low pass filter is active The low pass filter affects the quality of the mea sured signal compared to a measurement without a filter The RRC filter comes with an integrated Hamming window If selected two more settings become available for configuration the Roll Off Factor and the Cut Off Frequency Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 157 Roll Off Factor Filter Type Multi Carrier Defines the roll off factor of the RRC filter which defines the slope of the filter curve and therefore the excess bandwidth of the filter Possible values are between 0 01 and 0 99 in 0 01 steps The default value is 0 02 This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 157 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF on page 156 Cut Off Frequency Filter Type Multi Carrier Defines the frequency at which the passband of the RRC filter begins Possible values are between 0 1 MHz and 2 4 MHz in 1 Hz steps The default value is 1 25 MHz TT User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 63 R amp S FSW 84 K85 6 2 3 2 This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FII C
231. in the base unit description Query parameters lt ResultType gt TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 Reads out the trace data of the corresponding trace in the speci fied measurement window The results of the trace data query depend on the evaluation method in the specified window which is selected by the LAY ADD WIND command The individual results are described in chapter 11 9 3 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 234 CTABle For the Channel Table result display reads out the maximum val ues of the timing phase offset between each assigned channel and the pilot channel see SENSe CDPower TPMeas com mand To query the detailed channel information use the TRAC DATA TRACE1 command for a window with Channel Table evaluation LIST Queries the results of the peak list evaluation for Spectrum Emis sion Mask measurements For each peak the following entries are given lt peak frequency gt lt absolute level of the peak gt lt distance to the limit line gt For details refer to the TRACe DATA command in the base unit description Usage Query only 11 9 3 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt The results of the trace data query TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt depend on the evaluation method in the specified window which is selected by the LAY ADD WIND command For each evaluation method the returned values for the trace data query are d
232. in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes e Annex Reference material e List of remote commands Alpahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual e Index User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 7 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Preface Documentation Overview 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following parts e Getting Started printed manual e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation CD ROM with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and options Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the R amp S website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com prod uct FSW html Us
233. ing on the result display Note that the channel slot set is analyzed within the application data 6 2 9 Synchronization MS application only The Synchronization settings are only available for MS measurements They define how channels are synchronized for channel detection Sync To Defines the synchronization mode for frame synchronization detection of the first chip of the frame Two methods use the known sequence of a pilot channel Pilot or Auxiliary Pilot a third does not require a pilot channel For details see chapter 4 3 Synchronization MS application only on page 42 Auto The following modes are tried sequentially until synchronization was successful If none of the methods was successful a failed synchroni zation is reported Pilot Uses the correlation characteristic of the known pilot channel Auxiliary Pilot Similar to synchronization on pilot but with the different known sequence spreading code of the auxiliary pilot channel This mode is useful if the signal does not contain a pilot channel Channel Analyzes the power of any specified channel Power Remote command SENSe CDP SMODe on page 193 6 2 10 Channel Detection The channel detection settings determine which channels are found in the input signal e General Channel Detection Settings eere erento 93 e Channel Table Management isi occurreret eere ee ERK re GER GE Gee ee Ee 95 e Channel Table Settings and
234. ion In Composite Constellation evaluation the constellation points of the 1536 chips are displayed for the specified slot This data is determined inside the DSP even before the channel search Thus it is not possible to assign constellation points to channels The constellation points are displayed normalized with respect to the total power 2 Composite Constellation Fig 3 6 Composite Constellation display in the BTS application Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CCON See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES seeCALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 229 Composite Data Bitstream MS application only This result display is only available in the MS application for subtypes 2 or 3 The Composite Data Bitstream provides information on the demodulated bits for the special composite data channel and selected half slot regardless of which channel is selected 2Composite Data Bitstream Fig 3 7 Composite Data Bitstream result display User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 24 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays PEE eAQ U F P Ee Code Domain Analysis The number of displayed symbols depends on the spreading factor see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 266 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CDB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES
235. is indicated by the message PREAMBLE MISS ING see chapter 8 1 Error Messages on page 128 Spreading factor 32 is used for analysis of the PREAMBLE channel type as for the PILOT channel type Again only a BPSK I modulated channel should occur but with variable code number 4 4 2 MS Channel Types The following channel types can be detected in 1xEV DO MS signals by the 1xEV DO MS application Table 4 1 Channel types in 1xEV DO MS signals Channel Ch no Mapping Description type ISF PICH 0 16 l Reverse Pilot Channel RRI 0 16 l Reverse Rate Indicator DATA 2 4 Q Reverse Data Channel User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 44 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics El Channel Detection and Channel Types Channel Ch no Mapping Description type ISF ACK 4 8 l Reverse Acknowledgment Channel DRC 8 16 Q Reverse Data Rate Control Channel If the RRI and the PICH channel types are active it is assumed that for the first 256 chips 1 4 of the half slot 1 8 of the entire slot only the RRI and then the PICH is active in this half slot If only the PICH is active RRI activity 0 the PICH is active for the entire 1024 chips of the half slot Operating Modes Access and Traffic In the MS application there are two operating modes for transmission Access mode and Traffic mode The following diagrams show the possible channels together with their position on the and Q branc
236. is is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values e g transducer or trigger settings This information is displayed EE EE EE a User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 13 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Welcome to the 1xEV DO Applications eee SSS SSS EE EE EE EE ee EE SS Understanding the Display Information only when applicable for the current measurement For details see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 1 Code Domain Power 1 Clrw 34 Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in 1xEV DO applications 1 Window number 2 Window type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 5 Detector Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains the following information depending on the evaluation Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar LEE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 14 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays Code Domain Analysis 3 Measurements and Result Displays The 1xEV DO applications provide several different measurements for signals according to the 1xEV DO standard The main and default measurement is Code Domain Analysis In addition to the code domain power measurements
237. is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 It is not available if R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 81 11 5 4 Configuring Triggered Measurements The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 6 2 6 Trigger Settings on page 85 The OPC command should be used after commands that retrieve data so that subse quent commands to change the selected trigger source are held off until after the sweep is completed and the data has been returned e Configuring the Triggering Conditloris uarie erinnere tz 184 e Configuring the Trigger OBDIQDUL redire eere eene Eher Ranae RP nsn Ee RR GR Rg epus 190 11 5 4 1 Configuring the Triggering Conditions TRIGger SEQuence BBPowestHOLDolf 2 nanana isai atn SE RS Se ARR 185 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMs annee ern ket eret nr ke Rehd mnn ERR enr en RR e e nna e 185 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDOM TIME EE 185 TRiGger SEQuence lF Power HOLDO reciia eR reet RENE Eed 186 TRIGger SEOGuencel IFPower HYSTeresis issie ee ese ee se ee ee ee ee eek ee ee ee ee nnne renes 186 TRIGgerSEQuebce LE VELBBPAWER ii n EER ESE ME MERS cde ee eg cua EE ee eer De gs EE EA Ee GR eg 186 TRIGge
238. it buttons for a predefined channel table in the Channel Detection dialog box Channel Table Setting Add Channel Name SCHANS A Comment 1xEV DO standard table Delete Channel Channel Walsh Sym Rate A i Active Measure Table Ch SF ksps Modulation Mapping 0 HALFSLOT 15 0 16 76 8 BPSK I 1111111111111111 0 16 76 8 BPSK I 1010101010101010 48 153 6 000000000000 1000 8 16 76 8 0110000000000000 24 3072 1111111111111111 For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 16 Chanel Type ER et ER Ra RR EEN 99 Channel Number Walsh Ch ISF 99 SYMBOL RIG EUM 100 MOGUO DEE 100 POLAND EE 100 EA DE EE E 100 y ER ER EE OR EEN 100 Channel Type Type of channel according to 1xEV DO standard For a list of possible channel types see chapter 4 4 2 MS Channel Types on page 44 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 200 Channel Number Walsh Ch SF Channel number consisting of walsh channel code and spreading factor Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 200 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 99 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration 6 2 11 Code Domain Analysis Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted Modulation Modulation type used for transmission For a list of available modulation types see table 1 10 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA
239. ith the following channels PICH 0 64 and data channel with RC4 Walsh code 3 32 See Channel Type on page 98 See Channel Number Walsh Ch SF on page 98 See Modulation on page 98 See Power on page 98 See Status on page 98 See Modulation on page 100 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 199 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Configuring Code Domain Analysis CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt Mapping gt Activity Reserved1 Status lt Reserved2 gt This command defines a channel table The following description applies to EVDO MS mode K85 only For BTS mode see CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 198 Before using this command you must set the name of the channel table using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 197 command For a detailed description of the parameters refer to chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Param eters on page 16 Parameters lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt Mapping gt lt Activity gt lt Reserved1 gt lt Status gt lt Reserved2 gt Example The channel type is numerically coded as follows 0 PICH 12 RRI 2 DATA 3 ACK 4 DRC 5 INACTIVE 2104 0 15 0 I branch 1 Q branch 0 65535 decimal The decimal number interpreted as a binary number in 16 bits determines the half slot i
240. itude tab of the Input dialog box EES EE EE EE EE RE RE SSSR User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 82 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration Code Domain Analysis Input Source PowerSensor Amplitude Frequency Reference Level Input Settings Value 0 0 dBm I Q Mode tour Offset 0 0 dB Input Config Auto Level Swap I Q Off Fullscale Level Mode Value 0 25 V Peak The input settings provided here are identical to those in the Input Source gt Analog Baseband tab see Analog Baseband Input Settings on page 70 For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW VO Analyzer and VO Input User Manual Reference TEE 83 L Shifting the Display Offset 83 o MT T 84 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 84 Fullscale Level Mode Valtlg uice OE ME RE EE i 84 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the R amp S FSW hardware is adapted according to this value it is recommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Note tha
241. ize gt Sum of file sizes of all channel table files in bytes lt FreeMem gt Available memory left on hard disk in bytes lt FileName gt File name of individual channel table file lt FileSize gt File size of individual channel table file in bytes Example CONF CDP CTAB CAT Sample result description see table below 52853 2634403840 3GB 1 16 XML 3469 3GB 1 32 XML 5853 3GB 1 64 XML 10712 3GB 2 XML 1428 3GB 3 16 XML 3430 3GB 3 32 XML 5868 3GB 4 XML 678 3GB 5 2 XML 2554 3GB 5 4 XML 4101 3GB 5 8 XML 7202 3GB 6 XML 7209 MYTABLE XML 349 N Usage Query only EE EE EE N EN e 1 EE AALLLLLLLAAALALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLALLLLLLALLLLLALAAAALLLUTILLUAUUZE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 195 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Configuring Code Domain Analysis Manual operation See Predefined Tables on page 95 Table 11 4 Description of query results in example Value Description 52853 Total size of all channel table files 52583 bytes 2634403840 Free memory on hard disk 2 6 Gbytes 3GB_1_16 XML Channel table 1 3GB 1 16 XML 3469 File size for channel table 1 3469 bytes 3GB 1 32 XML Channel table 2 3GB 1 32 XML 5853 File size for channel table 2 5853 bytes 3GB 1 64 XML Channel table 3 3GB 1 64 XML 10712 File size for channel table 3 10712 bytes Channel table x CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY lt Fi
242. k Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 125 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Analysis BREET Markers Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEFT on page 254 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 252 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 254 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 252 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum RIGHt on page 254 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGHt on page 253 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 254 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 253 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 254 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 253 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum RIGHt on page 255 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 253 5 SEKR J GI Z 7 7 4 Marker Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search These functions are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu which is displayed when you press the MKR gt key Markers in Code Domain Analysis measurements In Code Domain Analysis measurements the markers are set to individual symbo
243. ker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not acti vate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram EE EE Ee EE RE e 9x User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 123 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Analysis mCMIMIOCC es Markers Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the specified reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 249 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 250 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 249 7 7 2 General Marker Settings General marker settings are defined in the Marker Config tab of the Marker dialog box Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Marker Table Code Domain Settings Trace Marker Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area bene
244. keywords to the same effect EE RU E e 1 e a User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 147 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 1 6 11 1 6 1 Introduction Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values IE ed Vallis ME EO OO N EE E 148 Ee RR ORE RO NEESS 149 Character Dat EE SERS De Ee ae ed Ge EG er ee AD Ge GE ed ee EE EE ee ER 149 Character Side RE AE EE EE EES 150 Block Dala ss ER OS ER oe Peru brc timed Ge ee Ge ee EG se RE ee a Ee GE 150 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical guantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the command uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set n
245. l e Auto Scale All on page 103 Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 203 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the fullscale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal com pression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 102 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration EENEG Code Domain Analysis You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 103 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 205 Auto Scale Window Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be displayed for the current measurement settings in the currently selected window No new mea surement is performed Auto Scale All Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be displayed for the current measurement settings in all displayed diagrams No new measurement is performed Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value Remote command SENSe ADJu
246. l applications and only if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector In the selection list you must specify which general purpose bit GPO to GP5 will provide the trigger data The following table describes the assignment of the general purpose bits to the LVDS connector pins For details on the LVDS connector see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Table 6 1 Assignment of general purpose bits to LVDS connector pins Bit LVDS pin GPO SDATAA P Trigger GP1 SDATAA P Trigger2 GP2 SDATAO P Reserve1 GP3 SDATA4_P Reserve2 GP4 SDATAO P Marker1 GP5 SDATAA P Marker2 Remote command TRIG SOUR GPO see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 188 IF Power Trigger Source Trigger Source The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger threshold is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency This trigger source is available for frequency and time domain measurements only It is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger bandwidth at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or UO measurements the third IF represents the center frequency The trigger th
247. l half slots for the DATA area Rho MAC RHOMac BTS application only RHO over all slots for the MAC area Rho Overall RHOVerall MS application only RHO over all half slots Rho Overall 1 2 RHO1 BTS application only RHO2 RHO verai_1 Over all slots over all chips with averaging starting at the half slot limit RHO era2 over all slots over all chips with averaging starting at the quarter slot limit Rho Pilot RHOPilot BTS application only RHO over all slots for the PILOT area Trigger to Frame TFRame Reflects the time offset from the beginning of the captured signal section to the start of the first slot In case of triggered data acquisi tion this corresponds to the timing offset timing offset frame trigger trigger offset start of first slot If it was not possible to synchronize the R amp S FSW to the 1xEV DO signal this measurement result is meaningless For the Free Run trigger mode dashes are displayed 9 in remote commands Slot or Half Slot Parameters The following parameters refer to the total signal that is all channels for the selected slot or half slot Table 3 2 Code domain power parameters for a specific half slot Parameter SCPI Parame Description ter Active Data Chs DACTive Number of active Data channels Active MAC Chs MACTive Number of active MAC channels Composite EVM MACCuracy The difference between the measured signal and the ideal re
248. le EE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 282 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Index SSA NE RE lef Results remote ego cic EET ElimINGUNG ac zoe vetri eee Results remote sse 229 K Keys BW A 58 LINES 58 MKR FUNCT Peak SeafE P see ees ses ok Es ee EER ENE Rd smee 127 RUN CONT zm RUN RE 101 SPAN 58 L Lines Men nee 58 Loading Riesen 55 Long codes 41 Agilent signals 42 Generation 42 Make M Cem 65 Mask remote 159 160 le Tue d EE EE Areas it wae 42 48 Lower Level Hysteresis kien 103 Low pass filter Multi carrier ees ee Re ee 63 65 157 M MAG channel ss Re AG td dra De 44 Evaluation 117 Power Map PING eee c 18 48 266 Channel table cerent ee feas 100 VO branches Gei Mode remote dude guff deeg ege sete dase 209 Retri ViNd EE 235 Selecting ee ds dees de des 117 119 209 Marker Functions ETE Ed 58 Markers lo ele 122 Configuring remote ssusssssss 248 251 Configuring softkey 121 RE el WEE 124 Delta Markers aires 123 Minimum Next minimum NE el SE RE EE baton 126 Peak Positioning Positioning remote ssssssessesss 252 Querying position remote ve Search settings duc Ladder ede 125 Settings remote A 249 State AR
249. leName gt This command copies one channel table into another one The channel table to be copied is selected with command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 201 Parameters lt FileName gt string with a maximum of 8 characters name of the new channel table Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name to be copied CONF CDP CTAB COPY CTAB 2 Copies channel table NEW TAB to CTAB 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Copying a Table on page 96 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete This command deletes the selected channel table The channel table to be deleted is selected with the command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAMI on page 201 Eri Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name to be deleted CONF CDP CTAB DEL Deletes the table Manual operation See Deleting a Table on page 96 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 196 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements b_i Configuring Code Domain Analysis CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABIe RESTore This command restores the predefined channel tables to their factory set values In this way you can undo unintentional overwriting Example CONF CDP CTAB REST Restores the channel table Usage Event Manual operation See Restoring Default Tables on page 96 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect lt FileName gt This command selects a p
250. longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This function is not available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See RF Attenuation on page 81 See Attenuation Mode Value on page 81 EEUU RU EA N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 182 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Configuring Code Domain Analysis INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly This function is not available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See RF Attenuation on page 81 See Attenuation Mode Value on page 81 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt
251. ls codes slots or channels depending on the result display Thus you can use the markers to identify individual codes for example Search Next ae AA etienne cna ek e b n aet kh ed ek OE N 126 Search Next MINIMUM EE 126 PEAK SAAG ES TIE 127 te irae RE OE OO AO OO EE ENG 127 Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum NEXT on page 252 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 254 Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 253 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 254 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 126 Markers Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 253 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on page 254 Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 253 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on pa
252. m iB 0 00 dB dB 0 00 dB Fig 3 22 CCDF measurement results in the 1xEV DO BTS application Remote command CONF CDP MEAS CCDF see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 154 Querying results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 232 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 244 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 244 CALCulate STATistics RESult lt t gt on page 246 E Gl Evaluation Methods for RF Measurements The evaluation methods for RF measurements are identical to those in the Spectrum application Ee A TOL E TELLE E ED 37 Result SOMER EE EE 38 Marker Table E 38 lasse di AA EE EE AE EO OE N 38 SEE HON EASE CE 39 Diagram Displays a basic level vs frequency or level vs time diagram of the measured data to evaluate the results graphically This is the default evaluation method Which data is displayed in the diagram depends on the Trace settings Scaling for the y axis can be configured EEUU EE M User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 37 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays SS SS ee eae ee RF Measurements CF 1 95 GHz 1001 pts 2 57 MHz Span 25 7 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH DIAG see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 Result Summary Result summaries provide the results of specific measurement functions in a table for numerical evaluation The conten
253. m the signal are available for selec tion a low pass filter and an RRC filter By default the low pass filter is active The low pass filter affects the quality of the mea sured signal compared to a measurement without a filter The frequency response of the low pass filter is shown below Frequency response of low pass filter Multi Carrier On Hep in dB 1 1 D 01 02 03 04 05 06 OF 08 O89 1 Frequency in MHz Fig 4 4 Frequency response of the low pass multi carrier filter The RRC filter comes with an integrated Hamming window The roll off factor of the RRC filter defines the slope of the filter curve and therefore the excess bandwidth of the filter The cut off frequency of the RRC filter is the frequency at which the passband of the filter begins Both parameters can be configured 4 7 Code Mapping and Branches Since 1xEV DO signals use long code scrambling the channel data is mapped either to the or to the Q branch of the complex input signal During channel detection the branch to which the data was mapped is determined and indicated in the channel table During analysis each branch of the symbol constellation area imaginary part or real part Q can be evaluated independantly Thus when analyzing signals you must define which User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 48 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics es EE EL P ER n 4 8 Code Display and Sort Order branch results you want to analyze Espe
254. marker lt m gt X lt Position gt This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See X value on page 123 a MH User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 250 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 10 2 2 General Analysis CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INIT Tiate CONTinuous on page 225 The unit depends on the application of the command Return values Position Position of the delt
255. measurement Parameters Mode AUTO ONCE MANual AUTO The mean power is calculated and the limit lines are set relative to that mean power value automatically ONCE The current mean power value of the averaged time response is used as the fixed reference value for the limit lines The reference mode is set to MANual Now the IDLE slot can be selected and the measurement sequence can be finished MANual The reference value for the limits are defined manually RST AUTO User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 211 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Configuring RF Measurements Example CALC LIM PVT REF AUTO Automatic reference value for limit lines The value should be set to mean power CALC LIM PVT REF MAN Manual reference value for limit lines CALC LIM PVT RVA 33 5 Set manual reference value to 33 5 CALC LIM PVT REF ONCE Set reference value to mean power CALC LIM PVT RVA Query reference value for limit lines The value should be set to mean power value Manual operation See Reference Mean Pwr on page 107 See Reference Manual on page 107 See Set Mean to Manual on page 107 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime RVALue lt RefLevel gt This command sets the reference level for calculating the limit lines Precondition is that the automatic mode of power calculation is switched off via the commands CALC LIM PVT REF ONCE or CALC L
256. mmand turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Preselec tor on page 68 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for VO Analyzer GSM VSA and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 68 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 O in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 The command is not available for measurements with the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 67 EE EE RU E San User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 162 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements DESEN Configuring Code Domain Analysis INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which connec tor is used to input data to the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed only RF input is supported Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ data o
257. ms an adjacent channel power measurement in the default setting according to 1xEV DO specifications adjacent channel leakage ratio The R amp S FSW measures the channel power and the relative power of the adjacent channels and of the alternate channels The results are displayed in the Result Summary User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 33 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays BRENNEN RF Measurements MultiView 1xEV DO BTS Ref Level RBW 10kHz Att 10dB SWT 100 ms VBW 300 kHz Mode Auto Sweep 1 ACLR CF 878 60845 AHz 1001 pts 419 0 kHz Span 4 19 MHz 2 Result Summary CDMA 2000 Channel Bandwidth Offset Power 1 MHz 9 84 dBm 9 84 dBm Offset Lower Upper d z 50 000 kHz 20 81 dB 15 58 dB Alti 100 kt 1 980 MH 78 61 dB 82 95 dB Fig 3 19 ACLR measurement results in the 1xEV DO BTS application Remote command CONF CDP MEAS ACLR see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 154 Querying results CALC MAREK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 244 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 244 ES Spectrum Emission Mask The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement determines the power of the 1xEV DO sig nal in defined offsets from the carrier and compares the power values with a spectral mask specified by the 1xEV DO specifications The limits depend on the selected band class Thus the performance of
258. n eege renati rendez vnde 118 e Channel Table Configuration ue cene i ded dec e deed en te nd a bed 119 N Ec 120 EE cc MTM N ER ER a aeee 121 7 1 Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS application Some evaluations provide further settings for the results The settings for CDA meas urements are described here omain Analyz Compensate IQ Offset Timing and phase offset calculation Code Domain Power CDP Average Code Power Display Absolute Relative Compensate ID OSSE RES ato adaa aa T a aa aiaa 113 Timingand phase offset calculation arreter tte a 113 GRAF ecco m EE ee oe ee GE Ee ee ee ee Ge ee 113 Gode Power DIS PIAY 113 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 112 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Analysis 7 2 Code Domain Analysis Settings MS application Compensate IQ Offset If enabled the UO offset is eliminated from the measured signal This is useful to deduct a DC offset to the baseband caused by the DUT thus improving the EVM Note however that for EVM measurements according to standard compensation must be disabled Remote command SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 206 Timing and phase offset calculation Activates or deactivates the timing and phase offset calculation of the channels to the pilot channel If deactivated or if more than 50 active channels are in the signal the calculation does not take place and dashes are displayed instead of values as results Remote comma
259. n I Q sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value ofthe ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The ScalingFactor mustbe gt 0 Ifthe ScalingFactor elementis not defined a value of 1 V is assumed User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 270 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Annex Reference VO Data File Format iq tar Element NumberOfChannels Description Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the VO data binary file For multi channels the VO samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the UO data file see chapter A 4 2 VO Data Binary File on page 272 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the UO data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt xyz a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples e xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float 4 e xyzreal 1ch int16 e xyz complex 16ch int8 UserData Pr
260. n W For SEM measurements the return value is the channel power of the reference range PPOWer Peak power measurements Returns the peak power The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W For SEM measurements the return value is the peak power of the reference range OBANdwidth OBWidth Occupied bandwidth Returns the occupied bandwidth in Hz Usage Query only User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 245 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Manual operation Retrieving Results See Power on page 32 See Channel Power ACLR on page 33 See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 34 See Occupied Bandwidth on page 35 See CCDF on page 36 CALCulate STATistics RESult lt t gt lt ResultType gt This command queries the results of a CCDF or ADP measurement for a specific trace Parameters lt ResultType gt Example Usage Manual operation MEAN Average RMS power in dBm measured during the measure ment time PEAK Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time CFACtor Determined crest factor ratio of peak power to average power in dB ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas lt mean power gt lt peak power gt lt crest factor gt CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2
261. n page 164 DiglConf Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This softkey is available in the In Output menu but only if the optional software is installed Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 20 360 86 Build 170 or higher is required To return to the R amp S FSW application press any key on the front panel The R amp S FSW application is displayed with the Input Output menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is mini mized not closed If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSW once again Analog Baseband Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the Analog Base band Interface R amp S FSW B71 in the applications that support it EE EE EE N EN AE e 1 EE 1 AALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULULLLLIM g User Manual 1173 9340
262. n should be successful Pilot synchronization For frame synchronization this method uses the correlation characteristic of the known pilot channel i e pilot channel sequence spreading code including scrambling sequence The correlation must be calculated for all hypotheses of the scrambling code 32768 for external triggers only 2048 in order to get the correct peak at the position where the frame begins This correlation method may fail if the power of the underlying pilot channel is too low compared to the total power In this case the expected correlation peak is hidden by the upcoming auto correlation noise of the bad hypothesis The frequency phase synchronization also takes advantage of the known linear phase of the pilot channel EE EE EE N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 42 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics Channel Detection and Channel Types Auxiliary pilot synchronization Similar to synchronization on pilot but with the different known sequence spreading code of the auxiliary pilot channel The benefits and problems of this approach are therefore identical to the synchronization on pilot This mode is useful if the signal does not contain a pilot channel Channel power synchronization This frame synchronization method does not require a pilot channel because it analyzes the power of any specified channel currently code 3 with spreading factor 4 which is the data channel 2 Again the channel power mu
263. n user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 191 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 191 T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 90 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Configuration m U EE Ee Code Domain Analysis Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe LENGth on page 192 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate on page 191 6 2 7 Signal Capture Data Acquisition You must define how much and how data is captured from the input signal Common Settings Sample Rate Invert Q Capture Settings Number of Slots Number of S
264. n which the channel is active value 1 or inactive value 0 See table 11 5 Always 0 reserved 0 inactive 1 active Can be used in a setting command to disable a channel tempo rarily Always 0 reserved INST SEL MDO Activate 1xEV DO MS CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Select table to edit CONF CDP CTAB DATA 0 4 0 0 65535 0 1 0 1 4 0 0 43690 0 1 0 2 2 2 1 05535 0 1 0 Selects PICH 0 16 on with full activity RRI 0 16 on in each even numbered half slot and DATA 2 4 on Q with full activity EE EE EE a User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 200 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 5 8 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Manual operation See Channel Type on page 99 See Channel Number Walsh Ch SF on page 99 See Status on page 100 See Activity on page 100 Table 11 5 Examples for lt Activity gt parameter settings Dec Binary Description 65535 1111 1111 1111 1111 Channel is active in each half slot e g DATA 43690 1010 1010 1010 1010 Channel is active in half slot 0 2 4 etc e g RRI 24576 0110 0000 0000 0000 Channel is active in half slot 1 and 2 e g DRC CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME Name This command creates a new channel table file or selects an existing channel table in order to copy or delete it Parameters Name string with a maximum of 8 characters name of the channel table RST R
265. nable DIOG PTRansitiON ee ee AR ee ke ee Re ee ee ee ee ee eke gee ee 170 STATusOUEG onable DIOTEVENOUN ee eek ee ee ee ee ee ee eek ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 170 STAT us QUESItionable SYNC CONDIIOFI eege eed ENE reet er der ER ede Geek Ge re ee E Ve Re de 260 STATus OUEStionable SYNC ENABIe ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Re Re ee ke ek ee Re ee ee Re Re ee ee ee ee eke STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition TRIGger SEQuence DT IMe vere trn tenti iere ehe Deer e hei e WER eN eb Eye Ee ran TRIGger SEQuence HOLDOff TIME TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDOff EE EE OR N TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPOWSer 1 reprennent tarn eed be Eb du DES rho hesia haa tienes ER Gee eek TRIGger SEQuence LEEVel IEPOWSt sees seks ses entr nh eren ep rn deba tenant geweek KEER Ge de Fee rne eek NEE TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPoOwWer N EE EE nr tnnt N TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPowWer esse ees ee ne Re see ntn Ge ke ee EG AG ee NR RA eke Gee AR Re Ga Gee Ee dk dk ee TRIGger SEQuence LEVel V 6o0 ottenere teneat enne En tn t re nr Rn repere Rp TRlGoert GEOuencelL EVell ESTemal portzl enne nnren nennen 187 TRIGger SEQuence SLOBe 2 RE OE EE OE OR EE TRIGger SEQuence SOURCS 5 EE EE bera A TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval SENSe ADJUSEALL EE EE EE EE aie de
266. nal Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector on the front or rear panel meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 88 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 74 External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 74 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 188 RETE RU RE E E e EE 1 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL L LU ULULULULLAA User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 87 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration EO R E MMMM Ht Code Domain Analysis Digital VO Trigger Source Trigger Source For applications that process VO data such as the VO Analyzer or optiona
267. name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus QUEStionable DIQ register for IQ measurements LEE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 170 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements mLAmETEO s Configuring Code Domain Analysis Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Example STAT OUES DIO Usage Query only 11 5 2 3 Configuring Input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 The following commands are required to control the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 in a remote environment They are only available if this option is installed For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Useful commands for Analog Baseband data described elsewhere INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 163 SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 177 Commands for the Analog Baseband cali
268. ncy 878 49 MHz 5 MEAS gt POWER The spectrum of the signal and the corresponding power levels within the 1 2288 MHz channel bandwidth are displayed MultiView Spectrum 1xEV DO BTS Frequenc y Center Ref Level 0 RBW 10 kHz 878 49 MH x Att SWT 100 rr VBW 300 kHz Mode Auto Sweep 1Rm Clrw CF 878 49 MHz 1001 pts 200 0 kHz Span 2 0 MHz 2 Channel wer CDMA 2000 Channel Bandwidth Offset Power 1 f MHz 10 14 dBm 10 14 dBm Fig 10 1 Meas 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power EE EE EE EE AE N S e IE e A AL LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLU ULULZXM X User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 134 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples Meas 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask 10 2 Meas 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask The 1xEV DO specification calls for a measurement that monitors compliance with a spectral mask over a range of at least 4 0 MHz around the 1xEV DO carrier To assess the power emissions within the specified range the signal power is measured with a 30kHz filter The resulting trace is compared with a limit line as defined in the 1xEV DO standard The limit lines are automatically selected as a function of the used band class Test setup gt Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the RF input of the R amp S FSW coaxial cable with N connectors Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET FREQ 878 49 MHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD 1xEV DO DIGITAL STD gt Set Defa
269. nd SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 207 CDP Average The Code Domain Analysis is averaged over all slots in the set For channel types Data and Preamble this calculation assumes that preambles of different lengths do not occur in the slots If active ALL is displayed in the Slot field in the channel bar This function is required by the 1xEV DO standard Remote command SENSe CDPower AVERage on page 205 Code Power Display For Code Domain Power evaluation Defines whether the absolute power or the power relative to the chosen reference in BTS application relative to total power is displayed Remote command SENSe CDPower PDISplay on page 207 Code Domain Analysis Settings MS application Some evaluations provide further settings for the results The settings for CDA meas urements are described here EET RU N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 113 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Analysis Code Domain Analysis Settings MS application Code Domain Settings Code Domain An er Common Code Order IRE ETHIEIRME Bit Reverse Compensate IQ Offset Timing and phase offset calculation Operation Mode Traffic Code Domain Power CDP Average Code Power Display Absolute Relative Power Reference PICH Total Code Display Onde 114 Compensate IG OISBL ET 115 Timing and phase offset calculation EE 115 CHS ATOM ModE E 115 GDF AVEI TEE 115 Code Power Dis play T AE RR EE ER ER 115 ordin
270. nd as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter RETREAT RU RA I E 1 EE LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLALALAALAAALLALALLLLLLLLLLAAAAALMLMMALALMLLALS L User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 145 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Introduction A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW d 11 1 1 11 1 2 Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions e Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required
271. ned bits Q4Q2 1536 E4E2 2304 11 9 3 9 Composite Data Constellation MS application The command returns the real and imaginary parts from each despreaded chip of the composite data channel o This evaluation is only available for subtypes 2 or 3 11 9 3 10 Composite Data EVM MS application The command returns the error vector magnitude for each despreaded chip of the com posite data channel o This evaluation is only available for subtypes 2 or 3 The number of returned values is 1024 11 9 3 11 Composite EVM RMS The command returns two values for each half slot in the following order Half Slot number gt value in gt The number of value pairs corresponds to the number of captured half slots 11 9 3 12 Peak Code Domain Error The command returns 2 values for each half slot in the following order half slot number level value in dB The number of value pairs corresponds to the number of captured half slots 11 9 3 13 Power vs Chip BTS application The command returns one value for each chip lt level value in dBm gt EE _ _ _ _ _ EA N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 240 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements EMG a senses RE eed 11 9 3 14 11 9 3 15 11 9 3 16 11 9 3 17 11 9 3 18 Retrieving Results The number of results that are displayed is always 2048 one power level for each chip Power vs Half Slot MS applic
272. nelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register The transition also writes a 1 into t
273. nly available with optional Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 For details on VO input see the R amp S FSW VO Analyzer User Man ual AIQ Analog Baseband signal only available with optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For details on Analog Baseband input see the R amp S FSW VO Ana lyzer User Manual RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 67 See Digital UO Input State on page 69 See Analog Baseband Input State on page 71 11 5 2 2 Remote Commands for the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 The following commands are required to control the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 in a remote environment They are only available if this option is installed Information on the STATus QUEStionable DIQ register can be found in STA Tus QUEStionable DIQ Register on page 168 e Configuring Digital VO Input and Output 164 e STATus QUEStionable DIQ Register 168 EEUU RA NN User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 163 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Configuring Code Domain Analysis Configuring Digital UO Input and Output Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands
274. nnel type channel type see table 11 2 code number code number of the channel with maximum phase offset code class code class of the channel with maximum phase offset reserved 1 4 gt 0 reserved for future use Results for CTABle Parameter MS application The command returns 12 values for each channel in the following order max time offset in s gt code number for max time code class for max time max phase offset in rad code number for max phase code class for max phase reserved 1 gt reserved 6 Value Description time offset maximum time offset in s code number code number of the channel with maximum time offset code class code class of the channel with maximum time offset phase offset maximum phase offset in rad code number code number of the channel with maximum phase offset User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 236 R amp SS9FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Retrieving Results Value Description code class code class of the channel with maximum phase offset reserved 1 6 gt 0 reserved for future use 11 9 3 3 Code Domain Error Power BTS application The command returns three values for each code in a channel code number error power power ID The number of results corresponds to the spreading factor see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page
275. nstalled T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 165 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements a_a a Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 69 INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling lt State gt If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the full scale level changes This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 70 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer Level Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that corresponds to an VO sample with the magnitude 1 This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters Level numeric value Range 1 UV to 7 071 V RST 1V Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 69 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Full Scale Level on page 69 The availability of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters Level VOLT DBM DBPW WATT DBMV DBUV DBUA AMPere RST Volt
276. nstead of values as results Remote command SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 207 Operation Mode The operation mode is used for the channel search Access The signal can contain only PICH always available and DATA chan nels Traffic The signal can contain all channels PICH RRI DATA ACK and DRC PICH and RRI are always available Remote command SENSe CDPower OPERation on page 206 CDP Average The Code Domain Analysis is averaged over all slots in the set For channel types Data and Preamble this calculation assumes that preambles of different lengths do not occur in the slots If active ALL is displayed in the Slot field in the channel bar This function is required by the 1xEV DO standard Remote command SENSe CDPower AVERage on page 205 Code Power Display For Code Domain Power evaluation Defines whether the absolute power or the power relative to the chosen reference in BTS application relative to total power is displayed Remote command SENSe CDPower PDISplay on page 207 Power Reference For Code Domain Power evaluation in the MS application only Defines the reference for relative power display Total Relative to the total signal power PICH Relative to the power of the PICH Remote command SENSe CDPower PREFerence on page 207 ERREUR RU E M User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 115 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Analysis Evaluation Range BTS application
277. nu to update the result displays for the changed application data R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples Meas 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power 10 Measurement Examples The following measurement examples demonstrate the basic Code Domain Analysis functions for the 1xEV DO standard These examples assume a basic test setup as described in chapter 4 9 Test Setup for 1xEV DO Base Station or Mobile Station Tests on page 50 The following measurement examples are basic 1xEV DO base station tests using a setup with a signal generator e g an R amp S SMU They are meant to demonstrate how operating and measurement errors can be avoided using correct settings The meas urements are performed on a 1xEV DO signal with an R amp S FSW equipped with the 1xEV DO BTS application Measurement examples for mobile station tests The measurements can be performed for mobile station tests in a similar way with the 1xEV DO MS application In this case use the following settings e DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt UP REVERSE e FREQ 833 49GHz The measurements are performed using the following devices and accessories e The R amp S FSW with Application Firmware R amp S FSW K84 1xEV DO Base Station Test e The Vector Signal Generator R amp S SMU with option R amp S SMU B46 digital standard 1xEV DO options R amp S SMU B20 and R amp S SMU B11 required e 1 coaxial cable 500 approx 1 m N connector e 1 coaxial cable 50Q
278. ocedures T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 100 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration mE R E M U UEEE ees Code Domain Analysis In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 202 SENSe AVERage COUNt on page 201 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT After triggering starts the sweep and repeats it continuously until stopped This is the default setting While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only con trols the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly Furthermore the RUN CONT key on the front panel controls the Sequencer not individ ual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode For details on the Sequencer see the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command INITiate CONTinuous on page 225 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE After triggering
279. of averaging pro cedures The Detector is automatically set to Sample View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 247 7 7 Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Markers are configured in the Marker dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Markers in Code Domain Analysis measurements In Code Domain Analysis measurements the markers are set to individual symbols codes slots or channels depending on the result display Thus you can use the markers to identify individual codes for example e Individual Marker SetingS Le Roe ce EE NR ee EE RR ee Ra De NAR Oe De 122 General Marker Settings ss EE DE el ARE EE Med ES Dee AE EE Nee f pls 124 e Marker Search Selle RE EE EE EER oe ER Ee kg Re Ge tnd eld ieee 125 e Marker Positioning PUNCHONS ie eege to tended Rando e tige Papers 126 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 121 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Analysis Markers 7 7 1 Individual Marker Settings In CDA evaluations up to 4 markers can be activated in each diagram at any tim
280. offset between the trigger event and and the start of the PCG eee User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 139 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples Meas 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power MultiView SS Spectrum 1xEV DO BTS Ref Level 3m Freq 978 49 MHz Channel 0 32 Code Power Relative Att 10dB Slot 0of3 Channel Type PILOT Subtype Ti 1 Code Domain Power I Branch Code 0 2 ode 2 Result Summary esults Set 0 Ji Error jue Fig 10 5 Meas 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 10 4 1 Adjusting the Trigger Offset If necessary the delay between the trigger event and the start of the frame can be com pensated for by adjusting the trigger offset In the described measurement example no significant delay is measured thus this step need not be performed 1 TRIG gt External Trigger 1 2 Setthe offset to the difference between the frame start and the trigger event TRIG gt Trigger Offset XXX s In the General Result Summary the Trigger to Frame offset between the trigger event and and the start of the frame should be eliminated 10 4 2 Behaviour With the Wrong PN Offset The last adjustment is setting the PN Pseudo Noise offset correctly The measurement is only valid if the PN offset on the analyzer is the same as that of the transmit signal gt Signal Description gt PN Offset 200 In the General Result Summary the Trigger to Frame result is not c
281. on the analyzed branch the channel is not occupied but an active channel exists on the other branch In Hadamard order the different codes are output in ascending order together with their code power The number of output codes corresponds to the base spreading factor In BitReverse order codes belonging to a channel are next to one another and are there fore output in the class of the channel together with the consolidated channel power The maximum number of output codes or channels cannot be higher than the base spreading factor but decreases with every concentrated channel For details see chapter 4 8 Code Display and Sort Order on page 49 Composite Constellation When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the real and the imaginary branches of each chip are transferred Re chip Im chips Re chip Im chip gt Re chip gt Im chip The number of value pairs corresponds to the number of chips from the 1024 chips in a half slot Composite Data Bitstream MS application The command returns the bitstream of one half slot for the composite data channel o This evaluation is only available for subtypes 2 or 3 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 239 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements SS BoB ed Retrieving Results The number of returned bits depends on the modulation type of the composite data channel Modulation Type Number of retur
282. onfig button and select the evaluation methods that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again Select the Analysis button in the Overview to configure how the data is evaluated in the individual result displays e Select the set slot or code to be evaluated e Configure specific settings for the selected evaluation method s e Optionally configure the trace to display the average over a series of sweeps If necessary increase the Sweep Average Count in the Sweep Config dialog box e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the results e g when comparing errors or peaks User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 129 R amp S FSW 84 K85 How to Perform Measurements in 1xEV DO Applications To define or edit a channel table Channel tables contain a list of channels to be detected and their specific parameters You can create user defined and edit pre defined channel tables 1 From the main Code Domain Analyzer menu select the Channel Detection soft key to open the Channel Detection dialog box To define a new channel table select the New button next to the Predefined Tables list To edit an existing channel table a Tap the existing channel table in the Predefined Tables list b Select the Edit button next to the Predefined Tables list
283. only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous com mand e Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords _ _ gt _ RE N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 146 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 1 3 11 1 4 11 1 5 Introduction The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS F
284. or Activating Deactivating Activating Deactivating remote Y maximum Y minimum Te RE rente EE EE RE 85 Z Zooming Activating remotel ees ee ek ee Re ee 222 Area Multiple mode remote 222 Area remote 221 Deactivating 104 Multiple mode erret 104 Multiple mode remote 222 223 auem E 221 Restoring original display sseusss 104 Single mode Single mode remote
285. orrect Also the error message SYNC FAILED indicates that the synchronization has failed Correct the PN Offset gt Signal Description gt PN Offset 0 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 140 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples Meas 5 Measuring the Composite EVM Now the PN offset on the R amp S FSW is the same as that of the signal In the General Result Summary the Trigger to Frame value is now correct 10 5 Meas 5 Measuring the Composite EVM The Error Vector Magnitude EVM describes the quality of the measured signal com pared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FSW In the I Q plane the error vector represents the ratio of the measured signal to the ideal signal on symbol level The error vector is equal to the square root of the ratio of the measured signal to the reference signal The result is given in In the Composite EVM measurement the error is averaged over all channels by means of the root mean square for a given PCG The measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time In the graphical display the results are shown ina diagram in which the x axis represents the examined PCGs and the y axis shows the EVM values Test setup 1 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSW 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial
286. ot missing This bit is set when the Preamble channel type is being investigated within the 1xEV DO BTS application and there is no preamble in the current slot The measurement results that can be read out for the Preamble channel type are not valid In MS application this bit is not used 5 BTS application only Preamble Overall missing This bit is set when the Preamble channel type is being investigated within the 1xEV DO BTS application and there is no preamble in at least one of the slots being examined The mea surement results that can be read out for the Preamble channel type are not valid if the analysis takes all slots into account CDP with Average Peak Code Domain Error Composite EVM In MS application this bit is not used 6 to 14 These bits are not used 15 This bit is always 0 STATUus QUESHIonable S YNOD GE KE 259 STATUSOUEStonable d e ee Te EE 260 STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle eene nennen ee Re ee nnn ee ee ee 260 STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition see ee ee ee nennen nnn nnne nena 260 STATUSOUESIonSDIS SYNE Ca e 260 STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 259 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Querying the Status Registers Query parameters lt Chan
287. ount has been reached Parameters lt SweepCount gt If you set a sweep count of 0 or 1 the R amp S FSW performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the sweep count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 100 See No of HalfSlots on page 106 Automatic Settings d MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the following automatic commands are not available as they require a new data acquisition However 1xEV DO applications cannot perform data acquisition in MSRA operating mode Useful commands for adjusting settings automatically described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 179 Remote commands exclusive to adjusting settings automatically SEET iori su FE nta im ots rer id ad b nb 203 ISENSeTADJuSECONEIgure DURS Es EE ee ee ee GE aa Ge ee napa duo use dee en Even ned 203 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE essere nnn 203 LSS N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 202 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements PEE 9 RA rn Configu
288. ow lt n gt REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix lt n gt from the display The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Usage Event User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 220 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Configuring the Result Display LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowT ype gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow command To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 for a list of available window types 11 7 3 Zooming into the Display 11 7 3 1 Using the Single Zoom DISPlayPWINDowensrZOONEAREA te i N RR N 221 DISPlay WINDow lt n ZOOM STA Te esse ERENS Ne ge SERS SE ER EA ENEE AE 222 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm mg 1 7 origin of coordinate system x1 7 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram
289. ow nzTRACevtGCALeMihNimum nnne nennen nnnm 180 DlGblavt WiNDow nzUTRACevtSCALelbDlVlelon nemen 180 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel sese 180 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet ee ee ee ee ek ee ee ee ee eene 181 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE 247 DISPlayWINDow n TRACe t STATe ettet ttt 248 DISPlayWINDow n ZOOM AREA ctt ttt ttt ttt ttc 221 DISPlayWINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA ettet ttt 222 DISPlay WINDowen ZOOM MULTIpleszoom STATe ee 223 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM STATe ettet ttt ttt ttt ttes FORMat DEXPort DSEParator usi uH yp M INI Tiate CONMAAS L4 cnet bier tf eerta eerte pl pa N N INIMiate GONTINUOUS ES ll EE ll elle Ee INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate INITiate SEQuerncetr MODE iterare t red pa Dr peteret erectae eso p Eae scene ed INMMiate SE Quencer REF Resh ALL oeste ses ee kerse N Nee eende Ee N bee ee eN Ee N ge es wese sk ge od ge Ke bee eke de ske ee INN M INPUGAT ENDE oT PR JS Te RRC ue TE EA Ka NEE INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet INPut CONNGCIOL i aici o ve arent eoe re Pen EC e RE ee EE naan INPUt COU PING ENE INPUt DIQ CDEV ICG ME OR OE EE EE CUN INPut
290. ow type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 for a list of available window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter Index1 Index2 Position This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the windows on each side of the splitter As opposed to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 214 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter perma nently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define conflicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error EESTI EE N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 218 R amp SEFSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Configuring the Result Display y 100 x 100 y 10
291. owing RF measurements Power vs Time BUS application ohly neto EE Res Gees ER dre citate 32 gol c M n 32 Channel Power ELS ttt Rte da tre ceo en e ee ee eg ge ee ee Rd 33 Spectum EmissiomMaSNK RE da er Ye hne eed 34 Occupied ee ie ii D 35 sugli EN 36 EE EE EE EE E S e V AE EE 1 1 LL A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLU LIS User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 31 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays SS 7 2 JC T C ed RF Measurements Power vs Time BTS application only The Power vs Time measurement examines a specified number of half slots Up to 36 half slots can be captured and processed simultaneously That means that for a standard measurement of 100 half slots only three data captures are necessary After the data has been captured the R amp S FSW averages the measured values and compares the results to the emission envelope mask This measurement is required by the standard for the Emission Envelope Mask It is only available in the BTS application The Power vs Time diagram displays the averaged power values versus time and the results of the limit checks Limit check indicates the overall result of all limit checks PVTFU PVTIU indicates the upper limit check PVTFL PVTIL indicates the lower limit check MultiView 3 Spectrum 1xEV DO BTS Ref Level 10 00 dam Freq 10 GHz Sample Rate 4 9152 Mr At
292. p S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements LEE Ee e H co Retrieving Results Query parameters Measurement ACPower MCACpower ACLR measurements also known as adjacent channel power or multi carrier adjacent channel measurements Returns the power for every active transmission and adjacent channel The order is power of the transmission channels power of adjacent channel lower upper power of alternate channels lower upper MSR ACLR results For MSR ACLR measurements the order of the returned results is slightly different power of the transmission channels total power of the transmission channels for each subblock power of adjacent channels lower upper power of alternate channels lower upper power of gap channels lower1 upper1 lower2 upper2 The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W CN Carrier to noise measurements Returns the C N ratio in dB CNO Carrier to noise measurements Returns the C N ratio referenced to a 1 Hz bandwidth in dBm Hz CPOWer Channel power measurements Returns the channel power The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power i
293. page 24 See Composite Data Constellation MS application only on page 25 See Composite EVM on page 25 See General Results BTS application only on page 26 See Peak Code Domain Error on page 27 See Power vs Halfslot MS application only on page 28 See Power vs Symbol on page 28 See Result Summary MS application only on page 29 See Symbol Constellation on page 30 See Symbol EVM on page 30 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INITiate CONTinuous on page 225 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 232 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements mAmETEO P H H Retrieving Results Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See CCDF on page 36 See Marker Table on page 38 See Marker Peak List on page 38 11 9 2 Retrieving CDA Trac
294. place or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see table 11 1 Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer SANALYZER Spectrum Usage Query only Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum VO Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 152 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements aS EEE es ee ee Sees Se ee Activating the Measurement Channel Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name Analog Demodulation ADEM Analog Demod R amp S FSW K7 GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay MCGD MC Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW PNOISE Phase Noise K40 VSA R amp S FSW K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS BWCD 3G FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72
295. r Code Domain Power Composite Constellation Peak Code Domain Error Power vs Half Slot Power vs Symbol Result Summary Symbol Constellation Symbol EVM Remote command SENSe CDPower SLOT on page 210 Set to Analyze Selects a specific set for further analysis The value range is between 0 and Number of Sets on page 92 1 Remote command SENSe CDPower SET on page 210 Branch Switches between the evaluation of the and the Q branch in MS measurements This affects the following evaluations Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power Peak Code Domain Error Power vs slot Result Summary Remote command SENSe CDPower MAPPing on page 209 Channel Table Configuration You can configure which parameters are displayed in the Channel Table evaluation by double clicking the table header A Table Configuration dialog box is displayed in which you select the columns to be displayed RETE RU RA I E e 1 e A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLILLI User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 119 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Analysis Traces Table Configuration ES F 6U Columns to be displayed Chan Type PowerDBm Ch SF PowerDB SymRate TOffs Modulation POffs Show Inactive Channels By default only active channels are displayed In order to display all channels including the inactive ones enable the Show Inactive Channels option For details on the individual parameters see chapt
296. r SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port ESE SA ER ERGE Ge We eg RENE RE De We ve Fees 187 TRiGger SE Quence LE Vell POWER se notice erc Ese ee DE GE ge Re o eene RSG Eg 187 TRlGoert GtOuencell EVel JObower ees ses ee ee ee Ee Re ee AA ee ee ee ee nnne nnne nnns 187 TRIGSer SEQuence EVelREPBPOWL se ss se Ee rra coeant Hau eae GN KAS Eg ena 188 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 184 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements EE EE RE R AM X Configuring Code Domain Analysis TRlGoert GtOuencell EVel Vlieog eee ee AA RA ea ER Ee ee ee ee ee ee AA Ge Re ee ee ee ee 188 TRIGoen SE Quem SLOPE E 188 TRiGgertSEQuemce S OU ROS coiere a iaaa i EE EE EENS 188 TRiGger SEQuence DAN ses ES eapite eto eaa eoa Re EE RE RR Re eed SES 190 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event The command requires the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 186 command for new remote control programs Parameters Period Range 150 ns to 1000s RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 n
297. r m MINimum LEFT esses nennen enne en neret nnn nre ee ke ee ee 253 CAL Culate cnz MAbRker mzMiNimumNENT rnnt 253 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHLE esses eene nenne nnne nnne nnn nre ee ee 253 CALCulatesn7 MARKersm MINimum PEAK esse ee ee ee ee Re Re ee Re ee nennen enne tenen de ee ee 253 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X 1 249 CAL Culatesn MARKoeremoe Y ied eid edita d ide ro tele eee eee ced fe rede d ea 232 CALCulate n MARKer m STATe sees nennen nennt nnne ee ee ee a ee ke 249 CONFigure CDPower BTSIBCLass BANDclasS ee ee ee ee ke ee ee ee ge ee ee ee rennen 213 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle CATalog esses ee ee ee ee ee ke ge ee ee ee 195 CONFigure CDPower BTSICTABIe COMMeD RA RR Re ek Re ee ke ee ee ede ee ee 198 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY E CONFioure CDbowert BTGtCTAble DATA eene nhen enn nnnen snnt ek sns n nensis sn ee nene CONFioure CDPowert BTGICTABle DATA CONFioure CDbowert BTGlCTAble DEL eie ee nene nennen nein nhn ee ee ee CONFioure CDPowert BTGICTABIeNAME AA CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle REST Ore nennen ee ee ee ek ee ee ee 197 E N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 274 R amp S FSW 84 K85 List of Remote Commands 1xEV DO CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELG Ct c csccesseseseesseccnssseseseeenseceasensessecneatensaoeapeensenseneencensenenneeaae 197 CONFigure CDPo
298. rall signal into account over the whole observation period all slots e Results that take a channel type such as MAC into account over the whole period of observation e Results that take a channel type such as MAC into account over a slot e Results that take a code in a channel type such as MAC into account over the whole period of observation e Results that take a code in a channel type such as MAC into account over a slot LEE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 15 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays EGET ee NP Code Domain Analysis Remote command CONF CDP MEAS CDP see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 154 e Code Domain Paramelers n ree ere ae eee ide rere diaries lense aes 16 e Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Anahysis AAA 20 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters In Code Domain Analysis three different types of parameters describe the measured signals e Global parameters for the current set e Parameters for a specific set and slot e Parameters for a specific channel All parameters are described in detail in the tables below including the parameters used for settings or results in SCPI commands see chapter 11 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements on page 145 Global Parameters The following parameters refer to the total signal that is all channels for the entire period of observation that is all slots Table 3 1 Global code domain power parameters
299. ration See Number of Slots on page 92 SENSe CDPower QINVert lt State gt This command inverts the Q component of the signal Parameters ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP QINV ON Activates inversion of Q component Manual operation See Invert Q on page 92 SENSe CDPower SET COUNt lt NumberSets gt This command sets the number of sets to be captured and stored in the instrument s memory Refer to Number of Sets on page 92 for more information Parameters lt NumberSets gt Range 1 to 1500 BTS mode or 810 MS mode RST 1 Example CDP SET COUN 10 Sets the number of sets to be captured to 10 Manual operation See Number of Sets on page 92 Synchronization MS application only Synchronization settings define how channels are synchronized for channel detection They are only available for MS measurements SENSEICDR ege eke n Er tere aree tete ere tue eese deve ea rides rade tae 193 SENSe CDP SMODe Mode The method used for the two synchronization stages the frame synchronization detec tion of the first chip of the frame and the rough frequency phase synchronization For details see chapter 4 3 Synchronization MS application only on page 42 ieee User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 193 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Parameters lt Mode gt Manual operation Configuring Code Domain Analysis AUTO The following modes are tried sequentially
300. redefined channel table file for comparison during channel detection Before using this command the channel table must be switched on first with the com mand CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 197 Parameters lt FileName gt RST RECENT Example CONF CDP CTAB ON Switches the channel table on CONF CDP CTAB SEL CTAB 1 Selects the predefined channel table CTAB 1 Manual operation See Selecting a Table on page 95 CONFigure C DPower BTS CTABle STATe State This command switches the channel table on or off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP CTAB ON Manual operation See Using Predefined Channel Tables on page 94 SENSe CDPower ICTReshold lt ThresholdLevel gt This command defines the minimum power which a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be regarded as an active channel Channels below the specified threshold are regarded as inactive Parameters lt ThresholdLevel gt Range 100 to 10 RST 40 dB Default unit dB LEE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 197 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 5 7 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example CDP ICTR 10 Sets the minimum power threshold to 10 dB Manual operation See Inactive Channel Threshold on page 94 Configuring Channel Tables Some general settings and functions are available when configuring a predefined channel table
301. reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVe1 on page 205 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range O dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 EEUU RU EE n User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 204 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements VEGTER GEENEEN Ge Oe N eN ee eee 11 5 10 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 103 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Reference Level on page 80 See Setting the Reference Level
302. reshold depends on the defined trigger level as well as on the RF attenu ation and preamplification For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet This trigger source is only available for RF input Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 188 Trigger Level Trigger Source Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source EE EE EE EE EE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 88 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration a SS Code Domain Analysis For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 187 For analog baseband B7 1 or digital baseband B17 input only TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 186 Drop Out Time Trigger Source Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Note For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 using the baseband power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid unintentional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 185 Trigger Offset Trigger Source Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Remote comman
303. ring Code Domain Analysis ISGENZGelAD lust CONEioure Hv teresle LOMer 204 SENSe JADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer ei se ERENS Nek dd Gee Ne bed de one AE Se ed 204 bdk RAT die ER OE EE ER EE OE OE ER ED 205 SENSe JADJustALL This command initiates a measurement to determine and set the ideal settings for the current task automatically only once for the current measurement This includes e Reference level e Scaling Example ADJ ALL Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All on page 102 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Parameters lt Duration gt Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 103 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S FSW determines the length of the measurem
304. ring Code Domain Analysis If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can con tinue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Parameters lt Source gt Example IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower First intermediate frequency Frequency and time domain measurements only Not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 IFPower Second intermediate frequency For frequency and time domain measurements only Not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 this command is interpreted as BBPower for compatibility reasons TIME Time interval For frequency and time domain measurements only PSEN External power sensor For frequency and time domain measurements only GPO GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 For applications that process VO data such as the VO Analyzer or optional applications and only if the Digital Baseband
305. rker State on page 123 See Marker Type on page 123 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X lt Position gt This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 249 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements VEER EE N EE Ee ee ee Se ee ee General Analysis Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB statistics Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 38 See Marker Peak List on page 38 See X value on page 123 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker AOFF This command turns all delta markers off Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 123 See Marker Type on page 123 CALCulate lt n gt DELTa
306. rmed as in the Spectrum application with the following settings Table 6 7 Predefined settings for 1xEV DO CCDF measurements CCDF Active on trace 1 Analysis bandwidth 10 MHz Number of samples 62500 VBW 5 MHz For further details about the CCDF measurements refer to Statistical Measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset e Analysis bandwidth e Number of samples User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 111 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Analysis Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS application 7 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the evaluation range trace markers etc can be configured via the Analysis button in the Overview Analyzing RF Measurements General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc for RF meas urements are identical to the analysis functions in the Spectrum application except for some special marker functions and spectrograms which are not available in 1xEV DO applications For details see the General Measurement Analysis and Display chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual e Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS application 112 e Code Domain Analysis Settings MS application 113 e Evaluation Range BTS application 116 s Evaluation Range MS applicatio
307. ronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual If the sweep mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 226 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous sweep OFF 0 Single sweep RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sweep mode to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 101 INITiate IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Example For Spectrum application INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Sets the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps
308. ror and the RHO Factor Test setup 1 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSW 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors 3 Connectthe external trigger input on the front panel of the R amp S FSW TRIGGER INPUT to the external trigger output on the front panel of the R amp S SMU TRIGOUT1 of PAR DATA Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET FREQ 878 49 MHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD 1xEV DO DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD o a Po N DIGITAL STD gt 1xEV DO gt STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 PRESET MODE gt 1xEV DO BTS AMPT gt Reference level 0 dBm FREQ gt Center frequency 878 49 MHz TRIG gt External Trigger 1 MEAS CONFIG gt Display Config gt Peak Code Domain Error Window 1 occ BY N AMPT Scale Config Auto Scale Once The following results are displayed the first window shows the diagram of the Peak Code Domain Error In the second window the General Result Summary is dis played RETE N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 143 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples REESEN Meas 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor MultiView SS Spectrum j 1xEV DO BTS RefLevel 0 00dBm Freq 87 Channel Code Power Relati
309. rri ener Feed 45 Trigger Adjusting Measurement example 140 CDP Measurement example is Configuration remote sees Configuration softkey sese Drop out time E External remote AA ale eo RD Hysteresis Ep Offset SO tK8V entree rore ese N en uge Ge Output Slope Trigger level External trigger remote esse eee ee 187 VO Power remote eek eke RR ee Re ke IF Power remote eise ese seke ee ee Re ee eke RF Power remote z BI elle oie AE AO icem IS I T User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 FES EUM 87 Ee AE AE tese rive ie ween 88 Trigger to frame m 16 Querying remote E 229 Troubleshooting 128 Input overload trinm 160 U UE User equipment see MS Mobile station eese 11 Units Reference level iese sss 80 83 Updating Result display remote sss 258 Upper Level Hysteresis Sunc M rc 103 Usermarnuals rre tree n ee ee Ee De ER cane 8 Ww Windows Adding remote Closing remote Configuring Layout remote Maximizing remote see 214 Querying remote 217 Replacing remote 218 Splitting remote 214 US OR EE 14 Types remote esses 215 X X value ET AE cte ctc etcetera 123 Y YIG preselect
310. rs on page 16 The channels that must be available in the signal to be analyzed and any other control channels are displayed first The data channels that are contained in the signal are displayed last If the type of a channel can be fully recognized based on pilot sequences or modulation type the type is indicated in the table The channels are in descending order according to symbol rates and within a symbol rate in ascending order according to the channel numbers Therefore the inactive codes are always displayed at the end of the table if Show inactive channels is enabled see chapter 7 5 Channel Table Configuration on page 119 Which parameters are displayed in the Channel Table is configurable see chapter 7 5 Channel Table Configuration on page 119 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CTABle see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power The Code Domain Power evaluation shows the power of all possible code channels in the total signal over the selected slot for the selected branch Code Domain Error Power is the difference in power between the measured and the ideal signal The x axis represents the channel code number which corresponds to the base spread ing factor The y axis is a logarithmic level axis that shows the error power of each channel With the error power both active and inactive channels can be evaluated at a glance Both evaluations support either
311. s TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 using the baseband power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid unintentional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range 0 sto 10 0s RST 0s Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 87 See Drop Out Time on page 89 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep data cap turing Parameters Offset RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 185 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Configuring Code Domain Analysis Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 87 See Trigger Offset on page 89 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff lt Period gt This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command is available for any trigger source not just IF Power Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger the R amp S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and VO data measurements Parameters lt Period gt RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF
312. s activated Now the IDLE slot can be selected and the measurement sequence can be finished Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k PVTime REFerence on page 211 Restart on Fail Evaluates the limit line over all results at the end of a single sweep The sweep restarts if the result is FAIL After a PASS or MARGIN result the sweep ends LEE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 107 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration 6 3 2 RF Measurements This function is only available in single sweep mode Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime FREStart on page 212 Signal Channel Power Measurements The Power measurement determines the 1xEV DO signal channel power To do so the RF signal power of a single channel is analyzed with 1 2288 MHz bandwidth over a single trace The displayed results are based on the root mean square The band width and the associated channel power are displayed in the Result Summary In order to determine the signal channel power the 1xEV DO application performs a Channel Power measurement as in the Spectrum application with the following settings Table 6 3 Predefined settings for 1xEV DO Output Channel Power measurements Setting Default Value ACLR Standard 1xEV DO MC1 Number of adjacent channels 0 Frequency Span 2 MHz 6 3 3 For further details about the Power measurement refer to Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power ACLR Measurements in
313. s simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute frequency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 179 Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings determine how the R amp S FSW must process or display the expected input power levels Amplitude settings for input from the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 are described in chapter 6 2 5 3 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input on page 82 To configure the amplitude settings Amplitude settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude dialog box p To display the Amplitude dialog box do one of the following e Select Input Frontend from the Overview and then switch to the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey Amplitude Reference Level Input Settings Value 0 0 dBm Preamplifier Offset 0 0 dB Input Coupling Unit I d Auto Level TEERDE Mechanical Attenuation Electronic Attenuation State Mode Mode Value User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 79 R amp S
314. scale AUTO on page 172 Parameters lt PeakVoltage gt 0 25V 0 5V 1V 2V Peak voltage level at the connector For probes the possible fullscale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power RST 1V Example INP IQ FULL 0 5V Manual operation See Fullscale Level Mode Value on page 84 INPut IQ TYPE lt DataType gt This command defines the format of the input signal ERE RU N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 172 R amp S FSW 84 K85 pame 11 5 2 4 Parameters lt DataType gt Example Manual operation Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Configuring Code Domain Analysis IQIIIQ IQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two input channels are required for each input signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature component l The in phase component of the input signal is filtered and resam pled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is not 0 see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 177 the in phase component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF I Q The quadrature component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 177 the quadrature component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q RST IQ INP IO TYPE O
315. se unit some special commands are available in 1xEV DO applications e 1xEV DO BTS Power vs Time Measurements eene 211 e 1xEV DO SEM and ACTLHRMeasuremente dee ss ee ee ee ee ee nennen nnne 213 E N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 210 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements EENEG Configuring RF Measurements 11 6 1 1xEV DO BTS Power vs Time Measurements The following commands are only available for Power vs Time measurements in 1xEV DO BTS application Useful commands for configuring RF measurements described elsewhere SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 202 Remote commands exclusive to 1xEV DO RF measurements CALCulate n LIMit k PVTime REFerence sesesesessses enitn nennt ntn nnn natn innt 211 CALCulate n LIMit k PVTime RVALUe ieeeeeess nein enne nnne nn aai nnn 212 CONFigure CDPower B S PVY Time BURSE EE 212 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime FRESIart aiani Ge EER en ehe dene ENKEN 212 CONFigure CDPowen BTS RP SUC uice SS AE NE AE EA Ge EE ONE GE dee Eua 213 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence Mode If enabled the mean power is calculated and the limit lines are set relative to that mean power The standard requires that the FULL slot first be measured with the limit line relative to the mean power of the averaged time response This value should also be used as the reference for the IDLE slot
316. seconds Usage Query only EE EE EE e e LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLUILLLXX User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 257 R amp SS9FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 13 Querying the Status Registers INITiate REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SYSTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA mode not the MSRA Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INST SEL IQ ANALYZER Selects the IQ Analyzer channel INIT REFR Refreshes the display for the UO Analyzer channel Usage Event SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters Offset This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start ofthe extracted application data The offset must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to Record length RST 0 Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 87 See Capture Offset
317. sists of two half slots with identical structures Each half slot contains 1024 chips which are distributed as shown below according to the different channel types RETE RU RA I EU e EE A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLMLLMILSSELJ User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 40 Scrambling via PN Offsets and Long Codes A Slot 2048 chips A 1 Half Stot 1024 PR 4 MAC Pilot MAC Dn pr m gt 00 chips chips chips T H Half Slots 0 83 ms period following Total slots Chips v 768kops 1024 WE QPSK 8 1088 7 en 12208 Y N 153 6 kbps 1024 1 5 QPSK 4 1344 3 gt 1600 6144 YIN Bo2kps 10M M5 PSK 2 1472 3 1600 sm Y N 614 4 kbps 1024 1 3 QPSK 1 1536 1536 vk jesus 204813 QPSK 2 1536 1 gt 1000 ze de 1896 vin jesus 3072 AB BPSK 2 1596 2 1000 ze vk ijuzesuos 4096 3 16 0AM2 1536 5 2 1000 ze Y N 2457 6 kbps 4096 1 3 16 QAM 1 1536 1536 a Rate Slots Packets requiring Preamble f Preembie always starte on a full siot boundary multiple slots use a 4 2 MACIndex encoded as W on I channel only slot interlace system Fig 4 1 Slot structure chip distribution and preamble lengths in 1xEV DO BTS application The 1xEV DO applications can capture up to 48000 slots about 80 seconds in a single Sweep In order to improve performance during measurement and analysis the captur
318. specified by the 1xEV DO standard the 1xEV DO applications offer measurements with predefined settings in the frequency domain e g RF power measurements For details on selecting measurements see Selecting the measurement type on page 57 Evaluation methods The captured and processed data for each measurement can be evaluated with various different methods All evaluation methods available for the selected 1xEV DO measure ment are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode The evaluation methods for CDA are described in chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 20 e Code Doman ANAS uii cree ax pee agat ER OE Medea 15 RF Measurements ER RE N 31 3 1 Code Domain Analysis The 1xEV DO firmware applications feature a Code Domain Analyzer It can be used used to perform the measurements required in the 1xEV DO specification concerning the power of the different codes In addition the modulation quality EVM and RHO fac tors frequency error and trigger to frame time and also peak code domain error are determined Constellation analyses and bit stream analyses are similarly available The calculation of the timing and phase offsets of the channels for the first active channel can be enabled The observation period can be adjusted in multiples of the slot Basically the firmware differentiates between the following result classes for the evalu ations e Results which take the ove
319. st CONFigure DURation MODE on page 203 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual This function allows you to change the measurement duration for automatic setting adjustments Enter the value in seconds Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 203 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 203 Upper Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 204 Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 204 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 103 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration Code Domain Analysis
320. st be calculated for all hypotheses of the scrambling code 32768 for external triggers only 2048 Only for the correct position the result is low inactive channel or high active channel in contrast to the wrong hypoth esis Obviously a small band exists for which we will not get a power drop or peak if the power of the tested channel is nearly equal to the noise of the other hypotheses from total signal The frequency phase synchronization works in the same way as for the methods above with the difference that here both pilot channels are tried consecutively 4 4 Channel Detection and Channel Types The 1xEV DO applications provide two basic methods of detecting active channels e Automatic search using pilot sequences The application performs an automatic search for active channels throughout the entire code domain At the specific codes at which channels can be expected the application detects an active channel if the corresponding symbol rate and a suffi ciently high power level is measured see Inactive Channel Threshold on page 94 Any channel that does not have a predefined channel number and symbol rate is considered to be a data channel In the MS application a channel is considered to be active if a minimum signal noise ratio is maintained within the channel e Comparison with predefined channel tables The input signal is compared to a predefined channel table All channels that are included in the predefined channel t
321. t 125 Performing 1xEV DO measurement ees esses 129 Phase Offset seg ESE NA Ee Ek ee repa T Ee RE SEE EE Calculating Results remote ern 229 233 big RE 235 PICH Channel type cutter rre tere irruere eege geess 44 Power reference ee ee ee ee ee ee Re Re ee ee ee 115 207 Predefined channel table 263 265 PICHRRI Predefined channel table 263 265 Pilot channel Evaluation sessssse cesses 117 j iP Preamble ad Be SE OS RE rr EE eterne an False Measurement example 140 Power Absolute e PAS ii EE EE ie ED ee Ee eN Channels e Data es tetra ET Inactive channels MAC Reference Reference Display luum ep dL E Threshold i Dc EE vs chip evaluation method sssssssss 27 vs chip results remote ss vs half slot evaluation method 28 vs half slot results remote sse vs symbol evaluation method 2 vs symbol results remote sssssse Power control groups le ea EE steep do Aes 15 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 284 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Index Power VS TIME s error retro te Pe ER Ge SE GE GR ER EE YE 105 Preamble Mi RA a EE Ie 18 41 Preamble channel 2 n rrr GESE EENS NE NEER ese EE H 44 Evaluation i ie r
322. t 20 dB Count 100 100 TRG EXTI 1 Power vs Time 2 List Evaluation Start 3 MAX us us dBm d dBm emm r ra 10 05 18 Fig 3 17 Power vs Time measurement results in the 1xEV DO BTS application Remote command CONF CDP MEAS PVT see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 154 Querying results CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime LIST RESult on page 246 Power The Power measurement determines the 1xEV DO signal channel power To do so the 1xEV DO application performs a Channel Power measurement as in the Spectrum application with settings according to the 1xEV DO standard The bandwidth and the associated channel power are displayed in the Result Summary User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 32 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays RF Measurements MultiView 33 Spectrum 1xEV DO BTS Reference Level Ref Level RBW 10 kHz 0 dBm Att SWT 100m VBW 300kHz Mode Aut 1 1001 pts 200 0 kHz Span 2 0 MHz CDMA 2000 Bandwidth Offset Power M 10 55 dBm 10 55 dBm Fig 3 18 Power measurement results in the 1xEV DO BTS application Remote command CONF CDP MEAS POW see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 154 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 244 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 244 Channel Power ACLR Channel Power ACLR perfor
323. t Summary Fig 10 6 Meas 5 Measuring the Composite EVM 10 6 Meas 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor The Code Domain Error Power describes the quality of the measured signal compared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FSW In the I Q plane the error vector represents the difference of the measured signal and the ideal signal The Code Domain Error is the difference in power on symbol level of the measured and the reference signal projected to the class of of the base spreading factor The unit of the result is dB In the Peak Code Domain Error PCDE measurement the maximum error value over all channels is determined and displayed for a given PCG The measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time In the graphical display the results are shown in a diagram in which the x axis represents the PCGs and the y axis shows the PCDE values A measurement of the RHO factor is shown in the second part of the example RHO is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideal reference signal The maximum value of RHO is 1 In that case the measured signal and the reference signal are identical When measuring RHO it is required that only the pilot channel is active EET RE E e e 1 EE 1A LLLLLLAAAAAAALALLLLLLLMLMMMXS User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 142 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples REENERT Meas 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Er
324. t for a remote query abbreviations or assignments to a numeric value are used as described in chapter 11 5 7 Channel Detection on page 194 Specific commands e Retrieving Calculated CDA Results eene tenentes 228 e Retrieving CDA Trace Results ee EG EERDER RE REG DAG ERROR tuentur nne 233 e Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE n sss 234 e Exporting Trace Fees 2o eai rio ax re cioe ex Dei tat reato ren deer 242 Retrieving RF beeuke cc cece Ne ESE eterna tende teen annee GR de Ge Bl ee cae 243 11 9 1 Retrieving Calculated CDA Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the calculated results from the CDA measurements CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESUuIt c cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 229 CAL Culate nzMAbkercmscN rttr rtrt tt te rrt tErEro nrn nEn anmenn trenn E ne 232 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 228 Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult Parameter This command queries individual parameters from the measured and calculated results of the 1xEV DO code domain power measurement For details on individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 16 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Query parameters Parameter Retrieving Results For each result add the corresponding query parameter ACTive
325. t the Reference Level value ignores the Shifting the Display Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel on page 180 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly EE M M M User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 83 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration EENEG Code Domain Analysis Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value Note however that the Reference Level value ignores the Reference Level Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle To determine the required offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal A positive value indicates that an attenuation took place R amp S FSW increa ses the displayed power values a negative value indicates an external gain R amp S FSW decreases the displayed power values The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 181 Unit Reference Level For CDA m
326. t this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 7 2 Working with Windows in the Display on page 215 Parameters Evaluation Type of evaluation you want to display See the table below for available parameter values Example CALC FEED XPOW CDP Selects the Code Domain Power result display Table 11 8 Evaluation parameter values String Parameter Text Parame Evaluation ter XTIM CDP BSTReam BITStream Bitstream XTIM CDP COMP CONStellation CCONst Composite Constellation XTIM CDP CBSTReam CDBits Composite Bitstream MS mode with subtype 2 or 3 only XTIM CDP COMP CONSt CDConst Composite Data Constellation MS mode with subtype 2 or 3 only KPOW CDEPower CDEPower Code Domain Error Power XTIM CDP COMP EVM CDEVm Composite EVM KPOW CDP RATio CDPower Code Domain Power User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 261 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements SS Ewe ed Commands for Compatibility String Parameter Text Parame Evaluation ter XTIM CDP MACCuracy CEVM Composite EVM XTIM CDP ERR CTABle CTABle Channel Table XTIM CDP PVCHip PCHip Power vs Chip BTS mode only PHSLot Power vs Halfslot MS mode only XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain PCDerror Peak Code Domain Error XTIM CDP PVSYmbol PSYMbol Power vs Symbol XTIM CDP ERR SUMM
327. ta channel Composite Data CODMulation MS application only Modu Modulation type and selected branch of the composite data channel Mapping MS application only Modulation type including mapping 0 I branch 1 Q branch 2 and Q branch Modulation Type MTYPe BTS application only Modulation type including mapping 0 BPSK I 1 BPSK Q 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16 QAM 5 2BPSK Modulation types QPSK 8 PSK 16 QAM have complex values Phase offset between the selected channel and the pilot channel If enabled see Timing and phase offset calculation on page 113 the maximum value of the phase offset is displayed together with the asso ciated channel in the last two lines Since the phase offset values of each active channel can be either negative or positive the absolute values are compared and the maximum is displayed with the original sign 9 for e CDP TPM OFF e gt 50 active channels found e inactive channel Symbol EVM EVMRms EVMPeak RMS or Peak value of the symbol EVM measurement result For further details refer to Symbol EVM on page 30 RETE EE A e IE AE EE A LL L L L LLALALZLZ User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 19 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays pm EE EE EE me Ee EN EE EEN EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE ON EE ER SST Code Domain Analysis Parameter SCPI Parame Description ter Symbol Rate SRATe Symbol rate in ksps wi
328. tate gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected EE EE RU E E e LL 1 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLUUILAALLLLZ User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 167 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements lt DeviceName gt lt SerialNumber gt lt PortName gt lt NotUsed gt lt MaxTransferRate gt lt ConnProtState gt lt PRBSTestState gt lt NotUsed gt lt Placeholder gt Example Manual operation Configuring Code Domain Analysis Device ID of the connected device Serial number of the connected device Port name used by the connected device to be ignored Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the con nected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done to be ignored for future use currently 0 OUTP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU2O0OA 103634 Out A 10000000 1000000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 See Output Settings Information on page 76 See Connected Instrument on page 77 STATus QUEStionable DIQ Register This register contains information about the state of the digital VO input and output This register is available with option Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Digital Base band Interface R amp S FS
329. tector RMS Trace Mode Average The measurement specific settings for the Power vs Time measurement are currently not available via the Overview only via softkeys in the Power vs Time menu which is displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key Furthermore the following buttons are not available in the Overview e Signal Description e Signal Capture e Synchronization e Channel Detection The following settings can be configured for the Power vs Time measurement NOT DIA SIBI oe ee sivas eae ra e der trae rrr trt n e ra een 106 igo m EE N EE en 106 BUIELEK vice cetera ee AS EG facta ED MS Ee DE ee tI 107 Reference Mean PWI ees sees ee ee Ee Ee ee ER Ee eke ee ee enne e ee ee Re ee enses rese enses nan 107 Reierepcs OT CN 107 Set M an NET BEE 107 Isestart TEE 107 No of HalfSlots Defines the number of halfslots used for averaging The default value is 100 Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 202 RF Slot Defines the expected signal The limit lines and the borders for calculating the mean power are set accordingly Full Full slot signal The lower and upper limit line are called PVTFL PVTFU User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 106 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration m UU0044FB 8 8 ___ _ _ __ X__ ZF RF Measurements Idle Idle slot signal The lower and upper limit line are called PVTIL PVTIU
330. ted 2 nine t e ERAS 92 193 Bid RR M 40 Evaluation range ssss 92 117 119 210 Selecting D 92 117 119 210 Stored OE Re EE 92 193 Settings uu ee 59 Show inactive channels sse 119 Signal capturing Remote commands see ee ee 192 le EN Signal channel power Measurement examples seen 133 Signal description EYE eo SEE EE EE EEN BTS Configuration is ele ul EE ede RE EE EO NE N MS Configuration i Remote commands loj e m Signal source PROMOS oasis E 163 Single sweep iic M M 101 Single ZOOM e 104 Slope Eee E E E E EE Ed oo Captured niini ee n eet Ee EN Evaluation range Number of symbols Parameters EE rerit TE el ER AE OR Softkeys Amplitude Config eese 79 Pope 102 Auto Lee uice t tester bine 80 84 102 Bandclasses 109 110 Burst Fitrenin EE dte bg ed EER 107 Capture EE me perite etre 90 Center E Channel Detection rre 93 Code Domain Settings uuuuuss 112 113 Continue Single Sweep Continuous Sweep sss 101 DiglConf Digital VO sabe Display eel AE EE trea hne eroe Reihe 15 57 Evaluation Range eeen 116 118 Export xu 87 Freg RUN RE RE EE 87 Frequency Config 77 IF Power IMPON rora
331. th which symbols are transmitted Timing Offset TOFFset Timing offset between the selected channel and the pilot channel If enabled see Timing and phase offset calculation on page 113 the maximum value of the timing offset is displayed together with the asso ciated channel in the last two lines Since the timing offset values of each active channel can be either negative or positive the absolute values are compared and the maximum is displayed with the original sign 9 for e CDE TPM OFF e 250 active channels found e inactive channel 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis The captured VO data can be evaluated using various different methods without having to start a new measurement All evaluation methods available for the selected 1xEV DO measurement are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode To activate SmartGrid mode do one of the following EE Select the SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Display Config button in the configuration Overview e Select the Display Config softkey from the MEAS CONFIG menu The selected evaluation not only affects the result display but also the results of the trace data query see chapter 11 9 3 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 234 The Code Domain Analyzer provides the following evaluation methods for measurements in the code domain EES oe oc N RA AE EE RE N 21 BIS GChantpelBesulte EE
332. the DUT can be tested and the emissions and their dis tance to the limit be identified Note The 1xEV DO standard does not distinguish between spurious and spectral emis sions User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 34 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays a SS ea s RF Measurements MultiView 2 Spectrum 13 1xEV DO BTS Ref Level 0 00 dBm Mode Auto Sweep 1 Spectrum Emission Mask CF 878 608453352 MHz 1001 pts 800 0 kHz Span 8 0 MHz 2 Result Summary cdma2000 BCO DL Tx Power E Tx Bandwidth MHz RBW 30 000 kHz Ran Frequency Power Abs Power Rel AUimit Fig 3 20 SEM measurement results in the 1xEV DO BTS application Remote command CONF CDP MEAS ESP see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 154 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 244 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 244 CALCulate LIMit k FAIL on page 243 LH Gl Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Bandwidth measurement determines the bandwidth in which in default settings 99 of the total signal power is to be found The percentage of the signal power to be included in the bandwidth measurement can be changed The occupied bandwidth Occ BW and the frequency markers are displayed in the marker table IERE EE EE EE EE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 35 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result
333. the R amp S FSW User Manual Channel Power ACLR Measurements The Adjacent Channel Power measurement analyzes the power of the TX channel and the power of adjacent and alternate channels on the left and right side of the TX channel The number of TX channels and adjacent channels can be modified as well as the band class The bandwidth and power of the TX channel and the bandwidth spacing and power of the adjacent and alternate channels are displayed in the Result Summary Channel Power ACLR measurements are performed as in the Spectrum application with the following predefined settings according to 1xEV DO specifications adjacent channel leakage ratio Table 6 4 Predefined settings for 1xEV DO ACLR Channel Power measurements Setting Default value Bandclass 0 800 MHz Cellular Number of adjacent channels 2 For further details about the ACLR measurements refer to Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power in the R amp S FSW User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 108 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration RF Measurements e RBW VBW e Sweep time e Span e Number of adjacent channels e Fast ACLR mode The main measurement menus for the RF measurements are identical to the Spectrum application However for
334. the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified functions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corresponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the R amp S website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html gt Downloads gt Firmware Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as dia ments log boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quota tion marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation marks
335. thods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The 1xEV DO evaluation methods are described in chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 20 EEUU RU EE EE EE N e e e EE AA LL 1LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLUIUUUUMSIXSI User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 57 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration Code Domain Analysis To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the 2 Close icon in the righthand corner of the toolbar or press any key on the front panel D For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual 6 2 Code Domain Analysis 1xEV DO measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW which you acti vate using the MODE key on the front panel When you activate a 1xEV DO application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application e center frequency and frequency offset e reference level and reference level offset e attenuation After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate a 1xEV DO application Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is started automatically with the default configuration The Code Domain Analyzer menu is displayed and provides access to the most important configuration functions
336. to Scale Once on page 85 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value of the y axis for the selected result display _LL_E______ e 1 SSS User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 179 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements PRENNE EE Ge Oe N eN ee HP u a IM Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Y Maximum Y Minimum on page 85 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MINimum Value This command defines the minimum value of the y axis for the selected result display Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Y Maximum Y Minimum on page 85 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible Parameters Value numeric value the unit depends on the result display Defines
337. to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level Remote command OUTPut DIQ CDEVice on page 167 Connected Instrument Displays information on the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 if available If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed e Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face e Used port Remote command OUTPut DIQ CDEVice on page 167 Frontend Settings The frequency amplitude and y axis scaling settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup e Frequency Seg uo edicere Leod e tao Ee idt v ka Dot e dec dade uae 77 Amplitude ne eec EE redis 79 e Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input 82 YAKS es AR MR AE OR EE ER EE eh 85 Frequency Settings Frequency settings for the input signal can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Select the FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey e Select the Frequency tab in the Input Settings dialog box LEE User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 71 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration Code Domain Analysis Frequency Center 13 25642 25 GHz Center Freq Stepsize VIER 1 0 MHz Frequency Offset Center Frequency EE 78 rediens OffSeb EE 78 Center Defines the normal center frequency of the signal The allowed range of values for the center frequen
338. tput Suffix lt port gt 213 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSW has triggered internally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 74 See Output Type on page 75 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output RETE RU EE a User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 191 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 5 5 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Suffix lt port gt 213 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Usage Event Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 74 See Output Type on page 75 See Send Trigger on page 75 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth Length This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix port 213 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Length Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 74 See Output Type on pa
339. tried 190 OLTPut PRIGSereponts DEE 191 OUTPULTRIG3eresort OT EE 191 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaaaeaeeneneneeeees 191 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe LENGIh esses rennen nnne nre rne 192 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction Suffix port 213 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Direction INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 74 ERREUR RU EE MN User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 190 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements REENEN Configuring Code Domain Analysis OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel Level This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut TESIGgereport2 OTYPe Suffix port 213 Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Level HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 74 See Output Type on page 75 See Level on page 75 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputType gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger ou
340. ts of the result summary vary depending on the selected measurement function See the description of the individual measurement functions for details 2 Result Summary Channel Bandwidth Power p 1 iz 0 86 dBm 0 86 dBm ower Upper 79 59 dB 80 34 dB 85 04 dB 83 85 dB Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 124 Stimulus Response Function Function Result 13 197 GH C der 1 70 unt Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 215 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 249 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 232 Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum or time domain How many peaks are displayed can be defined as well as the sort order In addition the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application I User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 38 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays mmm Ee ead RF Measurements 2 Marker Peak List No 1 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH
341. ty RA channel and the MAC reverse power control RPC channels with which the power of the active ter minals is controlled The MAC indices described in the standard MAC can be trans formed into Walsh codes very easily The analysis for the MAC channel type is per formed with spreading factor 64 BPSK I and BPSK Q modulation are used e DATA The DATA channel type is located with a length of up to 400 chips at the beginning and end of each half slot The useful data is transmitted in it As shown in figure 4 1 there are packets that transmit their data distributed over 1 2 4 8 or 16 slots depending on the transmission rate Initially a PREAMBLE range is transmit ted being between 64 and 1024 chips long followed by the data If more than one slot is required for transmission the other data of this data packet follows at intervals of four slots then without another preamble In the DATA channel type QPSK 8 PSK and 16 QAM modulation types are used Analysis is performed with a spreading factor of 16 e PREAMBLE The first 64 to 1024 chips of the DATA channel type are replaced by the PREAMBLE channel type at the beginning of a data packet Depending on the transmission speeds being used and whether the start of data of the packet is missed preambles of different length can be in the signal The application firmware detects the preambles automatically If the PREAMBLE channel type is examined and no preamble is found in the signal this
342. ual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included e Welcome to the 1xEV DO Measurements Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application e Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types e Measurement Basics Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the measure ment e Configuration Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command e VO Data Import and Export Description of general functions to import and export raw UO measurement data e Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the test setup e How to Perform Measurements in 1xEV DO Applications The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods e Measurement Examples Detailed measurement examples to guide you through typical measurement scenar ios and allow you to try out the application immediately e Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Remote commands required to configure and perform 1xEV DO measurements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided
343. uation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 184 INPut EATT AUTO on page 183 INPut EATT on page 183 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well The parameters Input Coupling and Impedance are identical to those in the Input settings see chapter 6 2 4 1 Input Source Settings on page 66 Preamplifier option B24 Input Settings If option R amp S FSW B24 is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For R amp S FSW 26 models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the preamplifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the following settings are available You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 181 INPut GAIN VALue on page 181 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input The following settings and functions are available to define amplitude settings for input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 in the applications that support it They can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Ampl
344. ult DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD N Oo oO hh o N DIGITAL STD gt 1xEV DO gt STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 PRESET 2 MODE gt 1xEV DO BTS 3 AMPT gt Reference level 0 dBm 4 FREQ gt Center frequency 878 49 MHz 5 MEAS gt Spectrum Emission Mask The spectrum of the signal is displayed including the limit line defined in the standard To understand where and about how much the measurement has failed the Gen eral Result Summary shows the frequencies where the largest spurious emissions in each range occurred eee User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 135 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples RE EE ME EE ER EE ER ER EE RUN Meas 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error MultiView 33 Spectrum 1xEV DO BTS Ref Level 0 00 dBm Mode Auto Sweep 1 Spectrum Emission Mask CF 878 608453352 MHz 1001 pts 800 0 kHz Span 8 0 MHz 2 Result Summary edma2000 BCO DL Tx Power 14 82 dBm Tx Bandwidth 1 229 MHz RBW 30 000 kHz Ran R UI Frequency Power Abs Power Rel AUimit Fig 10 2 Meas 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask 10 3 Meas 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error A Code Domain Power measurement analyzes the signal over a single Power Control Group PCG It also determines the power of all codes and channels The following examples show a Code Domain Power measurement on a test model with 9 channels In this measur
345. umeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command EET RU N User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 148 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 1 6 2 11 1 6 3 Introduction Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quan tities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of digits after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represented by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the
346. ure buffer start and the start of the extracted application data The offset must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 258 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connec tor Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 191 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 190 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger whe
347. ut can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dialog box Output Meas Time 31 28ius SRate 2 Mo Output Digital IQ Digital Baseband Output Output Settings Max Sample Rate 100 MHz Sample Rate 32 MHz Full Scale Level 0 dBm Instrument Device Name SMBV100A Serial Number 257374 Port Name Dig BB In For details on digital VO output see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Digital Baseband OWUIDUL ii EE keine rentre tet rnt adie een er Pate tane Ve Ke ees 76 Output Settings informalo cnc eee ndo e ter edd cee Mere bed Ge Ee Pee Menit eda 76 ers zero M 71 Digital Baseband Output Enables or disables a digital output stream to the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 if available For details on digital VO output see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Remote command OUTPut DIO on page 167 Output Settings Information Displays information on the settings for output via the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 The following information is displayed User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 76 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration 6 2 5 6 2 5 1 Code Domain Analysis e Maximum sample rate that can be used to transfer data via the Digital Baseband Interface i e the maximum input sample rate that can be processed by the connected instrument e Sample rate currently used to transfer data via the Digital Baseband Interface Level and unit that corresponds
348. ut in ascending order together with their code power The number of output codes corresponds to the base spreading factor In BitReverse order codes belonging to a channel are next to one another and are there fore output in the class of the channel together with the consolidated channel power The maximum number of output codes or channels cannot be higher than the base spreading factor but decreases with every concentrated channel ieee User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 238 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements EMEN ECCO 2 5 sm apgp 3 11 9 3 6 11 9 3 7 11 9 3 8 Retrieving Results For details see chapter 4 8 Code Display and Sort Order on page 49 Code Domain Power MS application The command returns four values for each channel code class code number error power power ID Value Description code class code class of the channel see table 11 3 code number code number of the channel power level depending on SENSe CDPower PDISplay absolute level in dBm of the code channel at the selected channel slot or relative level in dB of the channel referenced to total power in the channel type lt power ID gt type of power detection 0 inactive channel 1 active channel 3 quasi inactive channel
349. uto all A SOMKCY EE 102 Auto level Aborting Hysteresis see ee ee eerte 103 Sweep naka dened in RE EE EE EK 101 Reference level EN 80 84 102 ACIDG coupling rco erra ees 67 SOfKOV cora eR ee 80 84 102 Access Autosealing WEE 85 Operation mode ia ecrire i rh enr tne 45 Autosearch ACK Channel detection sssses Channel type ENEE 44 Auto settings ie ee ee ee ee ee ACLR Meastime Auto softkey 1xEWSDO r SUllS ii Ese ie EE ie EE ee Ee Ie VER Dee eek hath 33 Meastime Manual softkey Bandclasses eene 109 110 213 267 Remote commands EES EE Configuring 1XEV DO seen 108 Auxiliary pilot Results remote ENEE 244 Synchronization i e ee ee ee ee 42 93 Activating Average count ee ee ttt ee 100 1xEV DO measurements remote 150 Active channels D B Quast inactive 2 nnde ne eis 43 Active probe BA deele WE 73 Modulation types seem 47 Adjacent channel leakage ratio Bandclasses Sea ACLR Lust eed ve etes perth gus 33 ACUR M EE AE OD Agilent Defining Long code generation mode see ee 42 SEM doe EE EE RI OE adaa 23 Supported Amplitude Bandwidth Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 82 Coverage MSRA mode Configuration softkey s sss 79 Menu pe m Configuring remote Bit Reverse Settings peace de Tete ride GERE emer M Analog Baseband Bitstream Amplitude settings ccc
350. utput on page 190 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce esses hene ee nennen nne nsi ee ee ee ee ee sauna 176 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce State This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the front panel on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 74 Frontend Configuration The following commands configure frequency amplitude and y axis scaling settings which represent the frontend of the measurement setup For more information see chapter 6 2 5 Frontend Settings on page 77 EEUU RU EE E EE EE e e A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULLLLE X User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 176 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements VEGTER GIE N Ge AG ee U US n Q 11 5 3 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis UE 200 0 MEER 177 e Amplitude and EE re tti Di Pace iade eene 179 e Configuring the Aftenuatlori ou maed ado nee nde 182 Frequency SENS amp JFREDu sncy GENTE coiere ct HE ER ERAT Co ee EE EE doch 177 SENSE JPREQUBnO CENTERS TEP a uiia es es EE eto emen Se BA Roe ees a We AS Ge Red vede ua 177 ISENSe FREOuency CENTer STEP AUTO esse sees see ed ee ee sek ee ee ee ee rennen nennen eser nnns 178 SENSE EREOUSNGCENTSrSTEPLINK teen a he ee gee eN Reg See ENE ee cocta KEN Ge ended se
351. value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 11 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 146 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM EES EE EE E SSS User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 149 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Common Suffixes 11 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 11 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the transmission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of t
352. ve Att Slot Channel Type PII Subtyped 1 1 Peak Code Domain Error Slot 0 LSlot 2 Result Summary General Results Set Fig 10 7 Meas 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor Displaying RHO Make sure that all channels except the pilot channel code 0 64 are OFF so that only the pilot channel is available in the measurement No specific measurement is required to get the value for RHO The R amp S FSW always calculates this value automatically regardless of the code domain measurement per formed Besides the results of the code domain measurements the numeric result of the RHO measurement is shown in the General Result Summary by default in the second window User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 144 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Introduction 11 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measure ments The following commands are required to perform measurements in 1xEV DO applica tions in a remote environment It assumes that the R amp S FSW has already been set up for remote operation in a network as described in the base unit manual D Note that basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here For a description of such tasks see the R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this includes e Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data e Basic instrument configuration e g checking the syst
353. wer BTS CTABle S TATe esee eene enne 197 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency essen nnnm 156 CONFioure CDbowert BTGlMCAbrter EI TerbROEE 156 CONFigure CDPower BTSIMCARrier FILTer TWbPE esse esse ees ee se ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee nnne nennen 157 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer S TATe esee ene 157 CONFioure CDPowert BT GIMCAbrter MAL Go 158 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier S TATe eese nennen nennen 158 CONFigure CDPower BTSIMEASurement ee ees ee se ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ge ee nennen rennen 154 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime BURSE neret rte tnit FR KOR KERE RA eke tae Ke pea 212 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime FREStart ese ese ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Re ee ee ee ee Re ee ee ee ee ee nnns 212 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime LIST RESUIt oo ese see se ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ke ee 246 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime LIST STATe esee 262 CONFigure CDPower BTS RFSLot CONFigure CDPower BTS SUBTYype EE rrt neret rte ave teeta Ferne erre eee OE kg Re GE GER canada 158 DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE NSOUrGE AAR N RE RR ets 176 Bl vae RE N ae RR EE OE ER N N 214 DISPlayiM TABI RR EE N ON N dee 251 BISPIayEWINBOW SnP SIZE SE EE OE OE ER N 214 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE 179 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MAXimum essent 179 DlSblavf WiND
354. width 99 Channel bandwidth 1 2288 MHz The Occupied Bandwidth measurement determines the bandwidth that the signal occu pies The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth in which in default settings 99 of the total signal power is to be found The percentage of the signal power to be included in the bandwidth measurement can be changed For further details about the Occupied Bandwidth measurements refer to Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth in the R amp S FSW User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 110 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration KH RF Measurements e RBW VBW e Sweep time e Span 6 3 6 CCDF The CCDF measurement determines the distribution of the signal amplitudes comple mentary cumulative distribution function The CCDF and the Crest factor are displayed For the purposes of this measurement a signal section of user definable length is recor ded continuously in zero span and the distribution of the signal amplitudes is evaluated The measurement is useful to determine errors of linear amplifiers The crest factor is defined as the ratio of the peak power and the mean power The Result Summary displays the number of included samples the mean and peak power and the crest factor The CCDF measurement is perfo
355. with the CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency and CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF commands Parameters Type LPASs RCC RST LPAS Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter RETE RU EA EE EE N E e EE LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLXX User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 157 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Manual operation Configuring Code Domain Analysis See Multi Carrier on page 63 See Filter Type on page 63 See Roll Off Factor on page 63 See Cut Off Frequency on page 63 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo State This command activates or deactivates the enhanced algorithm for the filters in multi carrier mode Parameters State Example Manual operation ON OFF RST ON CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR MALG OFF Deactivates the enhanced algorithm See Multi Carrier on page 63 See Enhanced Algorithm on page 63 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe lt State gt This command activates or deactivates the multi carrier mode Parameters lt State gt Example Manual operation ON OFF RST OFF
356. ypes refer to chapter A 2 Chan nel Type Characteristics on page 266 Remote command SENSe CDPower CTYPe on page 209 Evaluation Range MS application The evaluation range defines which part of the signal is analyzed in the result display Channel Slot Set Select Branch EE NE ba cen IE EE OR OO tage tenis OE EE OE ONE 118 NEE EE 119 SOL CO AMAL rd EET 119 BIRD cua eg a eo ME cn EL EE N IE 119 Channel Selects a channel for the following evaluations see also chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 20 Bitstream Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power Peak Code Domain Error Power vs PCG Power vs Symbol Result Summary Symbol Constellation Symbol EVM The specified code is selected and marked in red For details on how specific codes are displayed see chapter 4 8 Code Display and Sort Order on page 49 User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 118 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Analysis T 5 Channel Table Configuration The number of available channels depends on the specified channel type For channel type PILOT and PREAMBLE values between 0 and 31 are valid For channel type MAC the range is between 0 and 63 and for DATA channels the range is 0 to 15 Remote command SENSe CDPower CODE on page 208 Half Slot Selects a half slot for the following evaluations Bitstream Channel Table Code Domain Error Powe
357. zer or optional applications E User Manual 1173 9340 02 08 55 Import Export Functions For details see chapter 5 VO Data Import and Export on page 55 Remote command MMEMory STORe IQ STATe on page 256 MMEMory STORe IQ COMMent on page 256 Import Provides functions to import data IQ Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note that the UO data must have a specific format as described in chapter A 4 Refer ence VO Data File Format iq tar on page 268 VO import is not available in MSRA mode For details see chapter 5 VO Data Import and Export on page 55 Remote command MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe on page 255 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration Result Display 6 Configuration The 1xEV DO applications provide several different measurements for signals according to the 1xEV DO standard The main and default measurement is Code Domain Analysis In addition to the code domain power measurements specified by the 1xEV DO standard the 1xEV DO applications offer measurements with predefined settings in the frequency domain e g RF power measurements Only one measurement type can be configured per channel however several 1xEV DO applications can be configured in parallel on the R amp S F

R&S FSW-K84/-K85 1xEVDO User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSW-K84/-K85 1xEVDO User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSW-K84/-K85 1xEVDO User Manual